513
SGS MarkUser’s Manual

Mark User Manual- optitex

  • Upload
    andres

  • View
    1.359

  • Download
    350

Embed Size (px)

DESCRIPTION

Mark User Manual- optitex

Citation preview

Page 1: Mark User Manual- optitex

SGS Mark™User’s Manual

Page 2: Mark User Manual- optitex

SCANVEC GARMENT SYSTEMS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

This agreement gives you certain rights and duties regarding the Software Program, the User’s Guides and thecopy protection key (the “Key”) that you are licensing from Scanvec Garment Systems Ltd. (“Scanvec GarmentSystems”). The Software Program, the User’s Guides and the Key will be referred together here as the “LicensedMaterials”.1. License grant and termination. Scanvec Garment Systems grants you personal, non-transferable, non-exclusivelicense to use the Licensed Materials for the ordinary purposes of your business. If you breach any terms of thisAgreement, this license will immediately terminate and you must promptly return the Licensed Materials toScanvec Garment Systems. The Licensed Materials are proprietary products of Scanvec Garment Systems, andScanvec Garment Systems retain title to and ownership of the Licensed Materials.

2. Scanvec Garment Systems copyright, etc. no copies or transfer, etc. You acknowledge that the LicensedMaterials are protected by copyrights held by Scanvec Garment Systems’ parent company. You acknowledgethat Licensed Materials embody trade secrets owned by Scanvec Garment Systems’ parent company. You maynot copy any part of the Licensed Materials for any purpose. You may not disassemble, decompile, reverseengineer or otherwise modify, tamper with or make changes to the Licensed Materials under any circumstances.You may not rent, lease, loan, assign or transfer the Licensed Material to any third party. You may not allow anythird party to use the Licensed Materials or to make copies of them. You may not use the Software Programwithout the Key. You may not emulate, duplicate, replace or modify the Key.

3. Warranty, disclaims, remedies. Scanvec Garment Systems warrants that the Media containing the SoftwareProgram (the “CD’s”) are free from defects of materials and workmanship. SCANVEC GARMENT SYSTEMSDISCLAIM ALL OTHER EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES REGARDING THE CD’s AND THELICENSED MATERIALS. You agree that your only remedy for any breach of the above warranty will be that ifyou discover any defects in the CD’s within three months after receiving them, Scanvec Garment Systems willreplace the defective CD’s with non-defective CD’s.

4. No damages beyond Purchase Price. You agree that if, in connection with your use of the Licensed Materials,you incur direct or indirect injury of any kind, including injury to persons or property or lost profits, ScanvecGarment Systems shall be liable to you only for the Product Price. In no event will Scanvec Garment Systems,its stockholders, directors, officers or employees be liable to you for any damages, including lost profits or otherincidental or consequential damages arising out of your use or inability to use the Licensed Materials.

Copyright 2001, Scanvec Garment SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED

Page 3: Mark User Manual- optitex

Table of Contents

Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures ______________________ 1

Welcome to OptiTex! ____________________________________________________ 1

How to Use This Book ___________________________________________________ 2

Package Contents _______________________________________________________ 3

Registration____________________________________________________________ 3

Help Services Provided __________________________________________________ 3

Technical Support ______________________________________________________ 4

Installing OptiTex_______________________________________________________ 5

Configuring OptiTex to Your Plotter _______________________________________ 9

Configuring Output Control Center (OCC) as output manger _________________ 12

Setting Up a Plotter ____________________________________________________ 15

Page 4: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars_______________________________________ 17

The Tools _____________________________________________________________ 17

System Toolbar ________________________________________________________ 21

Marker Toolbar _______________________________________________________ 26

Piece Toolbar _________________________________________________________ 37

Page 5: Mark User Manual- optitex

Alignment Toolbar _____________________________________________________ 45

Placement Toolbar: ____________________________________________________ 49

Group Toolbar:________________________________________________________ 58

General Toolbar _______________________________________________________ 63

Page 6: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu_______________________________________________ 71

New (Ctrl+N) _________________________________________________________71

Open Marker File (Ctrl + O)_____________________________________________71

Open Marker Dialog Box: _______________________________________________72

Merge Several Markers _________________________________________________73

History_______________________________________________________________74

Open Style File ________________________________________________________77

Import from SGS Modulate _____________________________________________82

File Finder____________________________________________________________84

Save (Ctrl + S)_________________________________________________________95

Save As ______________________________________________________________95

Save Current Nesting ___________________________________________________97

Export to CAD/CAM Files _____________________________________________100

Layers Table Dialog Box: ______________________________________________103

Dictionary Dialog Box:_________________________________________________104

Export to DXF and AAMA Setup: _______________________________________106

Import from CAD/CAM Files___________________________________________108

Layers Table Dialog Box: ______________________________________________119

Dictionary Dialog Box:_________________________________________________121

Plot_________________________________________________________________123

Plot Options _________________________________________________________146

Plotter Setup _________________________________________________________148

Plotter Setup Dialog (OCC)_____________________________________________149

Page 7: Mark User Manual- optitex

Print _______________________________________________________________ 150

Report to Excel and E-Mail utilities______________________________________ 153

Exit (Alt+F4)_________________________________________________________ 157

Page 8: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 4: Piece Menu_____________________________________________ 159

Info (Ctrl+I) _________________________________________________________ 159

All Sizes Info _________________________________________________________ 166

Global Info __________________________________________________________ 168

Delete _______________________________________________________________ 170

Flip Vertical _________________________________________________________ 171

Flip Horizontal _______________________________________________________ 172

Make Hole (Ctrl+H) ___________________________________________________ 173

Join Pieces ___________________________________________________________ 174

Edit Piece____________________________________________________________ 174

Piece Pattern Editor Dialog Box: ________________________________________ 175

Rotate_______________________________________________________________ 178

Internals (Ctrl+E)_____________________________________________________ 180

Internal Text _________________________________________________________ 184

Holes and Internal Contours ____________________________________________ 185

Global Change Internals Parameters _____________________________________ 189

Place Selected Pieces___________________________________________________ 191

Page 9: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 5: Marker Menu___________________________________________ 197

Marker Definitions (Ctrl+M) ___________________________________________197

Marker List __________________________________________________________201

Clear Marker (Ctrl+C)_________________________________________________202

Remove (DEL or CTRL+R)_____________________________________________202

Piece Parameters______________________________________________________203

Copy Marker _________________________________________________________208

Duplicate (Ctrl+D) ____________________________________________________208

Array _______________________________________________________________209

Alignment____________________________________________________________212

Replace Pieces on Marker ______________________________________________215

Substitute ____________________________________________________________217

Detect Intersections____________________________________________________221

Check Current Solution ________________________________________________221

Highlight Selected pieces _______________________________________________222

Optimize Marker Cut/Plot Order ________________________________________223

Shared lines __________________________________________________________224

Optimum Calculations _________________________________________________229

Weights______________________________________________________________232

Bump/Cut lines _______________________________________________________232

Fabric Pattern ________________________________________________________233

Load Fabric Dialog Box ________________________________________________235

Stripe Definition ______________________________________________________239

Page 10: Mark User Manual- optitex

Relate Piece to Stripes (Shift+Home) _____________________________________ 243

Match ++ ™ _________________________________________________________ 245

Undo (Ctrl+Z) ________________________________________________________ 247

Redo (Ctrl+Y) ________________________________________________________ 247

Page 11: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 6: Group Menu____________________________________________ 249

To Create a Group: ___________________________________________________ 249

Substitute size for selected pieces ________________________________________ 249

Keep ________________________________________________________________ 250

Ungroup_____________________________________________________________ 251

Fix on Marker________________________________________________________ 251

Unfix Selected ________________________________________________________ 251

Unfix All ____________________________________________________________ 252

Stripe Adjust Group (Ctrl+G)___________________________________________ 252

Rectangular Block Fuse (Ctrl+B) ________________________________________ 253

Thrifty Block Fuse ____________________________________________________ 255

Optimum Block Fuse __________________________________________________ 255

Select Whole Bundle___________________________________________________ 255

Unify Pieces Orientation _______________________________________________ 256

Substitute One Bundle _________________________________________________ 256

Copy Size for Selected Pieces____________________________________________ 256

Page 12: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 7: View Menu _____________________________________________ 257

Pieces on Marker _____________________________________________________ 257

Display Pieces on Marker Dialog Box: ____________________________________ 257

Cut/Plot Order _______________________________________________________ 263

Stripes Lines _________________________________________________________ 263

Marker Full Length ___________________________________________________ 263

Zoom All Pieces on Marker _____________________________________________ 264

Piece Bar ____________________________________________________________ 264

Size Lists ____________________________________________________________ 264

Spread Marker _______________________________________________________ 266

Piece List ____________________________________________________________ 266

Zoom View Window ___________________________________________________ 267

Tool Bars ____________________________________________________________ 267

New Toolbar _________________________________________________________ 268

Customize ___________________________________________________________ 269

View the Status Bar ___________________________________________________ 270

Page 13: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 8: Options Menu __________________________________________ 271

Stripe Adjust _________________________________________________________271

Single Piece Gap ______________________________________________________271

Limit Rotation ________________________________________________________273

Round After Rotation __________________________________________________273

Colors _______________________________________________________________274

Fonts________________________________________________________________276

Working Units ________________________________________________________278

Preferences___________________________________________________________279

Post Saving Action /Export to ASCII Application___________________________286

AutoSave (Backup) file _________________________________________________287

Page 14: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu___________________________________________ 289

Stop_________________________________________________________________289

Continue_____________________________________________________________289

Start AutoNesting _____________________________________________________290

Auto Nest Selected Pieces _______________________________________________291

Auto Nesting To Separate Block _________________________________________291

Renest Pieces on marker________________________________________________291

Compact Arrangement_________________________________________________291

Duplicate Marker _____________________________________________________292

Auto Nesting Setup ____________________________________________________292

Auto Save of Markers__________________________________________________294

Compact Arrangement (Ctrl J) __________________________________________296

Duplicate Marker _____________________________________________________296

Solutions Reports _____________________________________________________297

Start Batch___________________________________________________________300

Stop Batch ___________________________________________________________310

Continue Batch _______________________________________________________311

Batch Messages _______________________________________________________311

AutoNest Queue_______________________________________________________311

Queue Menu__________________________________________________________312

Page 15: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation_______________________________ 315

Installing Algotex Plotters with SGS Software _____________________________ 315

Hewlett Packard 600 or 700 Ink Jet Plotter _______________________________ 318

Hewlett Packard 750C Ink Jet Plotter____________________________________ 325

Configuring the Hewlett Packard Draftmaster II Plotter ____________________ 334

Ioline 28 Plotter ______________________________________________________ 342

Ioline 600 Plotter _____________________________________________________ 352

Ioline Studio Plotter___________________________________________________ 362

Ioline Stylist Plotter ___________________________________________________ 371

Configuring the Ioline Summit Plotter For Use With SGS Software ___________ 379

Plotter Technology Plotter _____________________________________________ 393

Calcomp TechJet 720 Plotter ___________________________________________ 400

Gerber AP300 and AP310 Plotters_______________________________________ 406

Gerber AP700 Plotter _________________________________________________ 411

NovaJet Plotter_______________________________________________________ 416

Numonics Design Partner 9000 Plotter ___________________________________ 424

Summagraphic HighPlot 7100/7200 Plotter _______________________________ 431

Lectra plotter ________________________________________________________ 438

Configuring the Cutting Edge Cutter ____________________________________ 443

Eastman Cutter ______________________________________________________ 447

Configuring the Gerber Cutter S3250 ____________________________________ 451

Configuring the Gerber Cutter S-91 _____________________________________ 453

Configuring the Gerber Cutter S-93 _____________________________________ 456

Page 16: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 11: Help Menu ____________________________________________ 459

Index (F1) ___________________________________________________________ 459

Keyboard____________________________________________________________ 459

Using Help ___________________________________________________________ 460

Check Plug Protection _________________________________________________ 460

About OptiTex Mark __________________________________________________ 460

SGS On-Line _________________________________________________________ 460

Send File ____________________________________________________________ 461

How to Contact SGS___________________________________________________ 462

Page 17: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands ____________________________________ 463

Pull Down Menu Shortcut Keys _________________________________________ 463

Other Shortcut keys ___________________________________________________ 465

Uses of the Right Mouse Button _________________________________________ 467

Rotating Pieces with the Mouse__________________________________________ 467

Rotating Pieces with the Rotate Tool _____________________________________ 467

Moving Pieces with the Bump, Bump/Rotate, and Jump/Rotate Tools__________ 467

Moving Overlapped Pieces _____________________________________________ 468

Fabric Spreading Methods _____________________________________________ 468

Defining Pieces as Foldable _____________________________________________ 468

Placing Folded Pieces __________________________________________________ 469

Unfolding Pieces ______________________________________________________ 469

Scroll Bars Automatic Utility ___________________________________________ 470

Creating a Group _____________________________________________________ 470

Shortcut Key Table: ___________________________________________________ 471

Page 18: Mark User Manual- optitex

Glossary Terms ___________________________________________________ 477

Page 19: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures 1

Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures

Welcome to OptiTex!

OptiTex is your complete software solution for computerized pattern design,grading and marker making. It was created specifically for the manufacturer ofthe apparel, transportation interiors, upholstery and sewn products industries.

OptiTex’s powerful CAD tools enable you to draft pattern scratch or modifyexisting pattern quickly and accurately. Simply import a pattern from yourfavorite CAD/CAM program, create a new pattern using OptiTex’s freehanddesign tools or utilize OptiTex’s unique digitizing capabilities.

With OptiTex’s digitizing function, your pattern appears on your computerscreen as you digitize. If you make a mistake, simply erase it with the click ofa button. The OptiTex digitizing system is designed to work the way you wantto work. You can enter piece perimeters first, then enter notches, internals andother piece information later. It’s quick, easy and compatible with industrystandard digitizers.

Once your patters have been created and entered, OptiTex provides amultitude of interactive editing tools. The most commonly used design andediting tools are represented as icons in the OptiTex toolbar so you can accesscommands with the click of a mouse; there’s no need to navigate through aseries of pull down menus. Add or remove different types of notches, createdarts, add seam allowances pleats and buttons and view everything on screenas you are working.

Add, move or delete points of a pattern, or move entire section of a pattern toquickly lengthen or shorten pieces. And obtaining measurement has neverbeen easier. Whether you’re measuring vertically, horizontally, diagonally orbetween pattern pieces, OptiTex’s measuring tool is as easy to use your owntape measure.

Page 20: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual2

OptiTex Makes grading pattern pieces quick, simple and automatic is just asinteractive as the editing process. Grade any pattern, point by point or globallyaccording to previously stored rules. OptiTex enable you to witness the resultsimmediately on screen. With OptiTex , it’s easy to create your own rulelibraries, add new rules or remove old ones. You can even grade internals suchas notches, dart, pleats, buttons and lines.

When it comes to marker making, OptiTex provides both manual andautomatic nesting capabilities to help you design markers quickly andefficiently. In addition, OptiTex gives you the flexibility to change orderquintets, substitute size, change marker dimensions and additional patterns toyour marker from other styles. Match your pattern piece to specific locationson your striped, plaid or printed materials.

With the extensive training and knowledgeable technical support services weoffer, we are confident you will find OptiTex to be most users Friendlyproduction tool you have experienced.

Thank you choosing OptiTex.

How to Use This Book

This manual is design to mirror your computer interface. The chapters arebased on the pull down menus and tool icons. To find information in this book,use the index, table file, which allows you to view, print or save pertinentinformation.

The remainder of this chapter is dedicated to explaining the different trainingand technical support services SGS offer. Lastly, we offer completeinstallation directions with pictures.

Feel confident knowing that you not only purchased the most completesoftware package for computerized pattern design, grading and markermaking, but also that SGS will continue to support you in every way we can.

Page 21: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures 3

Package Contents

Security Lock

** VERY IMPORTANT** OptiTex will not operate without the SecurityLock!

Scanvec Garment Systems (SGS) will replace your CD if it is lost, but WILLNOT replace lost or stolen Security Lock. If the Security lock becomesdefective it will be replaced, but only after it has been returned to SGS. If youmust return the security lock, the package should be insured.

CD

The OptiTex Program Disk.

Documentation

OptiTex Manual and Lesson Plans

Registration

Before you begin, send in the Product Registration card to register yourself asan owner of OptiTex. This card can be faxed or mailed to the address on thecard.

As a registered owner, you’ll be informed of updates, upgrades and trainingseminars; you’ll be on the mailing list for technical bulletins and productinformation.

Help Services Provided

SGS offers extensive customer service. Below are the operational supportservices available to you as a Registered OptiTex user.

Page 22: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual4

Technical Support

Our US and Canada Technical Support department will provide assistance forproblems of a technical nature. If you are having problems printing or plotting,for example, technical support will assist you.

When calling for technical support, please be at your computer with thefollowing information:

• OptiTex Version Number.

• OptiTex Security Lock # (listed on the lock).

• Detailed description of the problem, including exact wording ofany error messages.

Technical Support offices

USATel.: 610-521-5970 Toll free: (US & Canada) 877 RING OPTIFax: 610-521-1564ISRAELTel.: 972-3-904-9979Fax: 972-3-904-2710

Internet

Messages can be sent via Internet to our support at the following address:E-Mail Technical Support: [email protected] Sales & Marketing: [email protected]

Web Page

http://www.optitex.com

Page 23: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures 5

Installing OptiTex

Before you run the installation program for OptiTex, make sure your computermeets the minimum requirements to run the software.

OptiTex Requirements

Pentium or better processor

16 MB of RAM

Microsoft Windows ™ 95

Hard Drive with 150 MB of free disk space

Microsoft mouse or other compatible pointing device

SVGA 15’’ monitor running at resolution 800X600, 256 colors,

1 parallel port, 1 serial port

Recommended Equipment

Pentium II – 350 or better processor

64 MB of RAM

Microsoft Windows ™ 95 or Windows 98 or Windows NT

Hard Drive with 150 MB of free disk space

Microsoft mouse or other compatible pointing device

AGP display card with 4 MB of memory

Page 24: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual6

17’’ monitor running at resolution 1024X768, 256 colors,

1 parallel port, 2 serial ports

USB port

SGS recommends using a Bus mouse if you intend to install a serial plotter ordigitizer, since most computers are only equipped with two serial outlets.

In order to use OptiTex, you need to do the following:

• Attach the OptiTex Security.

• Install the OptiTex Software.

• Configure your Plotter.

Attach the OptiTex Security Lock

There are five steps, which must be performed in order to attach the OptiTexSecurity Lock.

• Turn your computer off.

• Remove any cable or Security Lock which may be connected toyour printer (LPT1 – the printer port is a female slot at the rearpanel of your computer).

• Plug the male side of the OptiTex Security Lock into the printerport (LPT1).

! Note: Before plugging in the Security Lock you may want to write downthe serial number located on the plug. This number will be necessarywhen calling for Technical Support and is required on the ProductRegistration Card.

Page 25: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures 7

• Plug anything, which was previously attached to the printer intothe back end of the OptiTex Security Lock.

! Note: If you have a printer connected to the back of the OptiTex SecurityLock make sure the printer is properly grounded. If it is not groundedcorrectly, the printer can short out your Security Lock. Do not connectthe Security Lock to an A/B switch box or a cable, as this also short outthe Security Lock (you may find that it will work for a while, but it willeventually destroy the Security Lock). The OptiTex Security LockMUST be plugged DIRECTLY into the printer port (LPT1).

! Note: SGS does not guarantee that its copy protection and software arecompatible with all kind of computers.

Install the OptiTex Software

1. Start Microsoft Windows 95.

2. Place the CD in the CD-ROM drive of your computer.

3. The installation screen will display on the screen automatically.

4. Select “Install Optitex 8.0.”

5. In the first screen select the installation language. Click NEXT.

6. Select the Optitex language.

! Note: The installation will take few minutes to copy the necessary files toyour hard drive.

• The destination directory dialog box will be displayed. Thedefault installation path will be set to C:\Program files\Optitex8.Click Browse button to select a different path. Click Next.

Page 26: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual8

• Select the options that you would like to have install and clicknext.

The program will begin installing the files to the selected drive and directories.

After the installation is complete, a dialog box will display thanking you forinstalling the latest version of SGS software. Click OK and icons will beplaced on the desktop of your computer for OptiTex PDS and OptiTex Mark.To open PDS or Mark, double click on the correct icon. You must restart youcomputer after first OptiTex installation (no need to restart it if you upgradethe existing OptiTex software).

Page 27: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures 9

Configuring OptiTex to Your Plotter

There are several steps to configuring your plotter. You must set up yourcommunication parameters, configure the plot manager, and use the plottersetup command in the File menu.

You can use the plot manager of your choice. OptiTex supplies you withOutMan (output manager) which supports different standard and non-standardplotters as well as OCC. The OutMan uses Windows communication routinesand has its own Queue of file to plot.

Set Up Communication Parameters

You must first set up the communication parameters for the Com port to whichyour plotter is connected (there is no need to configure parallel port). Refer toyour plotter’s manual to find its particular communication parameters.

! Note: It is absolutely necessary to setup the communication parameters forthe Com port to which your plotter is connected.

Configuring the OutMan as the Output manger

To configure OptiTex to your plotter, the OutMan must be loaded on thestation connected to the plotter. This way all users can share the plotter. Do notload the Output manager on stations without a plotter connected.

The OutMan installation will copy all relevant files to your disk and place theOutMan icon in your Startup group. OutMan displays a complete review of thefile being plotted, including the amount of paper left on the roll and otheruseful information.

You must perform the following steps for each plotter you will be using.

Page 28: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual10

• On the station connected to the plotter, double click the OutManicon. The OutMan dialog box will be displayed.

• In the Out Man dialog box select the Communication commandin the Options menu. The Communication dialog box will thenbe displayed.

• Select the proper communication port and set the correctcommunication parameters for it.

OutMan Dialog Box

Stop Action

Stop Action command is used to stop the current plot job.

Page 29: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures 11

Exit

Exit command is used to close the output manager.

Communication

Used to set up the port, baud rate, data bits, parity, stop bits, flow, andprotocol.

Working Units

Allows you to choose the working unit of your choice: mm, cm, inches, orfeet.

Font

Allows you to change the font size and type.

About

Displays information about the version of software.

Page 30: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual12

Configuring Output Control Center (OCC) as output manger

The Output Control Center (OCC) is used to communicate with your plotter orcutter as well as manage all your plotting jobs.

The OCC supports plotters in local computer or on any other computer onyour network. OCC (Output Control Center) is a 32 Bit application,

native to windows, and it's main usage is for arranging a queue to plotters.

OCC can control all kind of output devices, regardless of how they areconnected to your computer. You can use serial, parallel & network plottingwith it at a great ease.

The following document comes to explain to you how to use this application.

Note that it's possible to set the OCC in the same way from our "Plot" dialogin OptiTex 8.0

The OCC user interface

The Occ application is built mainly from two windows.

The first one is the "Plotters and Queue window" and the second one is the"Jobs and Info. In queue"

The Toolbar is made of buttons which are always the same.

Make Job Ready

Making a plot job ready, and sending to plot

Hold Job

Leaves the job in the queue in order to plot it later.

Page 31: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures 13

Restart Job

Use this button to restart a stuck job or a job you want to re-print it.

You can also "restart" jobs that are already done and are in the done folder

of the selected plotter.

Delete Job

Removes the plot job from the queue.

Move Up

Move the job one level up in the queue.

Move Down

Move the job one level down in the queue.

Move to Top

Move the job to the top of the list.

Move to Bottom

Move the job to the bottom of the list.

Pause Job

Pausing the plot job, may be resume at any time.

Abort Job

Aborts the plotting job, but leaves it on the queue.

Page 32: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual14

Page 33: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures 15

Setting Up a Plotter

7. Open the OCC and choose "setup -> Plotters" from the filemenu.

• The “Plotter Setup” dialog appears:Press the "ADD" button, to add a new plotterChoose the way the plotter is connected and press "Next"If your plotter is connected directly to your computer, choose

"My computer"

• And if it's a plotter that's connected to another computer on yournetwork, choose "Network computer".Choose the way the plotter is set. Choose the port (LPT,COM orFile),

• Choose if you want to print to Lectra, Gerber or Standadplotting protocol, and choose the data bits, stop bits, parity andbaud rate as they are in your plotter's manual. In your plottermanual you should also have the switches (communicationparameters) for your specific plotter.

• After setting up everything press on the "Next" button.

• In the plotter name dialog, write the name of your plotter (or anyname you want) and choose a path where you want to keep yourqueue files (file to plot), and then press on Finish.

• If you want other people on your network to be able to plot withyour plotter, you have check the "Shared Plotter" box.

Page 34: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual16

In the new window you can see your plotters, and the name of the computerthat they are connected to. On the lower part of this window, you can seewhich plotter is the Default one, If you want to change the default plotter, allyou have to do is to click once on the plotter you want to make as default andthen press on the "set Default" button.

When you're satisfied with your plotter settings press the "Close" button, to getinto the main window of the OCC application again.

Page 35: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 17

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

The Tools

Tools are small icons or pictures that represent different features within thesoftware. Tools are displayed across the top of the screen in bars (rows)located below the pull down menus and above the piece bar. There are sevendifferent Toolbars in the MARK software:

The System Toolbar:

The Marker Toolbar:

The Piece Toolbar:

The Alignment Toolbar:

Page 36: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual18

The Placement Toolbar:

The Group Toolbar:

The General Toolbar:

Toolbars may be viewed on the screen, or they may be hidden from view.When all Toolbars are displayed, the size of the working area is reduced. Tocontrol the display of Toolbars on the screen, use the Toolbars command in theDisplay menu. To display a particular Toolbar on the screen, place a checkmark next to the name of the Toolbar. To hide a particular Toolbar, uncheckthe name of the Toolbar. To check or uncheck a selection, click on the nameof the Toolbar in the Toolbar Menu. Toolbars toggle from on to off each timethe mouse clicks on the name of the Toolbar.

To Customize a Toolbar:

1. From the View menu, select Tool Bars.

1. Click on Customize.

2. Click on New. Name the new toolbar.

Page 37: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 19

3. Click OK. The toolbar will display under the Toolbars tab and onthe working screen.

4. Select the Tools tab. On the right, the buttons are displayed forthe highlighted toolbar on the left.

5. Select the button to be placed in the new toolbar. A description ofthat button will display at the bottom of the dialog box.

6. Click and drag the button from the dialog box to the new toolbaron the working screen.

7. Lift the mouse button to drop the button into the toolbar. Repeatthis until all desired buttons are placed in the toolbar.

8. Click OK.

To Reset a Toolbar:

Resetting a toolbar replaces any buttons that were taken out of a defaulttoolbar.

2. From the View menu, select Tool Bars.

3. Highlight the desired toolbar.

4. Click Reset.

5. Click Close.

Engaging a Tool

Clicking once on the tool activates most tools. The cursor changes from thenormal pointer (an arrow) to another type of pointer that coincides with theselected tool. For example, when the Rotate tool is activated, the normal

Page 38: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual20

pointer turns into a curved arrow. The curved arrow reminds the user that therotate feature is currently activated.

Disengaging a Tool

Returning to the normal arrow pointer disengages a tool. To return to thenormal arrow pointer, either click on the tool that looks like an arrow, or clickthe right mouse button, and select the first option in the pop up menu, “SelectTool” using the left mouse button.

Selecting another tool from one of the Toolbars also disengages tools currentlyin use.

Page 39: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 21

System Toolbar

Release Tool

The Release tool (sometimes called the Select or the Arrow tool) is the defaulttool used in the Mark software. This tool is used to select pieces, points, andline segments.

! Note: To access the Release tool without clicking on the Release icon,click the right mouse button one time. With the left button, select theSelect tool from the pop-up menu.

New

Use the new tool to start a new marker (DSP) file. A DSP file contains all thepieces necessary to make one complete marker layout. When the New tool isselected, the Marker Definition dialog box displays by default. Enter specificmarker area information for the new marker and click Ok. Pattern files areloaded by using Open Style Files in the File Menu.

! Note: Refer to the File Chapter for more information.

Page 40: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual22

Open

The Open tool opens an existing SGS Marker file

! Note: SGS marker files have the extension, .DSP.

! Note: The last directory where marker files have been saved becomes thedefault directory for the Open and Save commands. Use the Browsebutton to select a different directory.

Save

The Save tool saves the file displayed on screen to the current path under thecurrent name, replacing the old file. If a new file has been created, but the newfile has not been previously saved, a dialog box prompts for a file name to beentered.

! Note: The DSP extension is added to the file name automatically.

! Note: The last directory where marker files have been saved becomes thedefault directory for the Open and Save commands. Use the Browsebutton to select a different directory.

! Note: Refer to the File Chapter for more information.

Page 41: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 23

Print

Use the Print Tool to activate the Print dialog box. Refer to the File Chapterfor in depth information.

Plot

Use the Plot Tool to activate the Plot dialog box. Refer to the File Chapter forin depth information.

About

Choose the About OptiTex Mark tool to find the version of OptiTex Mark thatis currently being used. This information is necessary when contactingTechnical Support for help with the SGS software.

Help Tool

Use the Help tool to get information about any item or feature in the SGSsoftware. Select the Help tool and then click on any item on the screen to getinformation about the selected item. Information regarding the selected itemdisplays on the screen.

Page 42: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual24

Page 43: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 25

Stop Auto Nest

When the automatic process begins, a clock icon will be displayed indicatingthat automatic placement is in process. To stop the Auto-nesting procedure,click the Stop icon. The Nesting process will be halted and only those piecesalready nested will stay on the marker.

The Auto-nesting procedure stops only after the current piece is placed on themarker. In cases where the current piece is complicated, or the solution task isvery large, it may take some time to stop the Auto-nesting procedure. Once theAuto-nesting procedure has been halted the user may change the PieceAttributes, move the nested pieces and place new pieces. The new attributeswill be taken into account when the Auto-nesting procedure is resumed.

Select Continue from the Nesting menu to resume the nesting in progress.

Redraw Marker

Pressing the Redraw Icon refreshes the marker area.

Page 44: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual26

Marker Toolbar

View All Pieces

A single-click on the View All Pieces icon will reset the screen to Full scale.

Zoom

Select the Zoom In tool to enlarge a specific area. The Zoom limitations areset by the current application and by Windows.

To Zoom:

9. Click the Zoom tool.

10. Click and drag a rectangle around the area to Zoom upon

Unzoom

A single-click on the Unzoom icon will reset the screen to the previous scale.

Page 45: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 27

View All Marker

A single click on the View All Marker icon displays the total marker areascaled to fit on the screen.

Undo

Use the Undo tool to reverse the most recent action performed in the markerfile. The Undo tool may be selected up to 20 times undoing the 20 most recentoperations, back to adding a piece to the marker area. Undo does not work toundo the loading of the file.

Redo

Use the Redo tool to inverse the most recent action. This command cancels thelast 20 operations, one at a time.

Measure

Select the Measure tool to measure distances between any two points. Thepoints can be vertical, horizontal or diagonal.

Page 46: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual28

To Measure

6. Click the Measure tool.

7. Click at the location you would like to begin the measurementand drag to the location you want to end the measurement.

8. The DX distance, DY distance, and the actual distance will bedisplayed along the bottom of the screen.

Notch

This tool adds, deletes, or edits a notch or button on pattern pieces.

To Add a Notch:

9. Click the Notch tool.

10. Click at the location on the piece to add the notch. The Edit Notchdialog box is displayed.

11. Select the desired Notch Attributes.

12. Click OK.

To Delete a Notch:

11. Click the Notch tool.

13. Click the notch to delete. The Edit Notch dialog box is displayed.

14. Click Delete.

Page 47: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 29

To Edit a Notch:

12. Click the Notch tool.

13. Click the notch to edit. The Edit Notch dialog box is displayed.

14. Select the desired notch attributes.

15. Click OK.

Edit Notch Dialog Box:

Page 48: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual30

Notch Type

There are six types of notches. Define the type of notch to cut on the piece.The T and I notch will both be cut as a slit notch on a numerically controlled(NC) cutter.

Mode

When using a numerically controlled (NC) cutter, the user can define whetherthe notch to be drawn, cut, or punched. Call the Fax Back System to learnhow to set the options for the various NC Cutters.

The result of each attribute is different depending on the type of outputmachine. Some machines can produce a single notch with different tools: Pen,Knife or a Special Punch tool. On different machines the knives could bedifferent: Circular, Tangential or Jig knives. Each machine has its ownadvantages and limitations.

Relative Angle

This option allows you to change the angle of the notch. For example, if youwould like the V notch to point out instead of in, apply a 180 degree angle tothe V notch.

Depth

This option allows you to change the depth of the notch.

Width

This option allows you to change the width of the notch. Usually the widthtwice the depth.

Page 49: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 31

Stripe Adjust Number and method

This option is used to match a piece on the notch to a stripe or plaid line. Formore information, see the Stripes and Relate Piece to Stripes commands in theMarker Menu.

Operation Stop

If you have a numerically controlled (NC) cutter, this option sets the cutter tostop cutting the notch Before with confirmation, after with confirmation,before (without a confirmation), After (without a confirmation), or Not Stop(no stop at all).

To Add a Button:

16. Click the Notch tool.

17. Click at the location you would like to add the button. The EditButton dialog box is displayed.

18. Select the desired Button Attributes.

19. Click OK.

To Delete a Button:

20. Click the Notch tool.

21. Click the button you would like to delete. The Edit Button dialogbox is displayed.

22. Click Delete.

Page 50: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual32

To Edit a Button:

23. Click the Notch tool.

24. Click the button you would like to edit. The Edit Button dialogbox is displayed.

25. Select the desired button attributes.

26. Click OK.

Edit Button Dialog Box:

Page 51: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 33

Mode

If you have a numerically controlled (NC) cutter, you can define whether youwould like the button to be drawn, cut, or drilled. Call the Fax Back System tolearn how to set the options for the various NC Cutters.

The result of each attribute is different depending on the type of outputmachine. Some machines can produce a single button with different tools: Pen,Knife or a Special Drill tool. On different machines you might find differentknives: Circular, Tangential or Jig knives. Each one it’s their own advantagesand limitations.

Radius

This area is used to define the size of the button to be cut.

Stripe Adjust Number

This option is used to match a piece on the notch to a stripe or plaid line. Formore information, see the Stripes and Relate Piece to Stripes commands in theMarker Menu.

Text

The Text tool changes the location, size, and angle of the Piece Descriptioninformation. The Piece Description information is determined by the DisplayPieces on Marker option in the Options menu. The Text also allows you to addor edit internal text on a piece. The internal text and piece descriptioninformation in the Internal Text Dialog box is displayed to scale.

Page 52: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual34

To Edit Piece Description Information:

27. Click the Text tool.

28. Click the cursor on the piece to edit. The Internal Text dialog boxis displayed.

29. Check Piece Description field. The Piece Description is displayedin the Text field.

! Note: If you would like the changes to occur on the selected size only,disable the All Sizes field.

15. Make the changes.

16. Click OK.

To Add Internal Text to a Piece:

30. Click the Text tool.

31. Click the cursor on the piece to edit. The Internal Text dialog boxis displayed.

32. Type the text that you would like to add in the Text box.

! Note: If you would like the changes to occur on the selected size only,disable the All Sizes field.

17. Make the desired changes.

18. Click OK.

Page 53: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 35

To Edit Internal Text On a Piece:

33. Click the Text tool.

34. Click the cursor toward the front of the text that you would like tochange. The Internal Text dialog box is displayed with the text inthe Text box.

! Note: If you would like the changes to occur on the selected size only,disable the All Sizes field.

19. Make the desired changes.

20. Click OK

Internal Text Dialog Box:

Text Editor

This box displays the text to edit.

Page 54: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual36

Text Parameters

The Size of font and base angle of the selected text can be changed.

The default text size for the size name and description is a minimum of 1 cmand 1 mm respectively. The Piece Description text can be changed using theGlobal Info command in the Piece menu.

Apply to All Sizes

When this option is enabled, the text will be changed or added on all sizes.When it is disabled, the text will be changed or added only to the selected size.

Show Cut/Plot Order

The Cut/Plot Ordering displays the order in which the pattern pieces will becut or plotted. Double click the right mouse button on a blank area of themarker to check and uncheck this option. The Cut/Plot Order can be changedusing the Optimize Cutting Order and Selected Piece Cutting Order commandsin the Marker menu.

Page 55: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 37

Left Adjust

Left Adjust places pieces in blank areas of the marker instead of using themanual dragging and dropping technique. Left Adjust enables the shootoperation usually done with the right mouse button to be done using the LEFTmouse button. This option takes into consideration all of the previouslyspecified options like rotating, mirroring and so on. The size, position andnumber of angles a piece has contribute to the amount of time it takes toAdjust the piece on screen.

Piece Toolbar

Adjust Left (Alt+4)

The Adjust Left arrow places and moves the selected piece(s) in the leftdirection until the piece(s) hits another contour.

! Note: The Alt+4 shortcut only works with the numeric keypad.

! Note: The arrows on the keyboard will move the piece in the selecteddirection 10 pixels at a time.

Page 56: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual38

Adjust Right (Alt+6)

The Adjust Right arrow places and moves the selected piece(s) in the rightdirection until the piece(s) hits another contour.

! Note: The Alt+6 shortcut only works with the numeric keypad.

! Note: The arrows on the keyboard will move the piece in the selecteddirection 10 pixels at a time.

Adjust Down (Alt+2)

The Adjust Down arrow places and moves the selected piece(s) in the downdirection until the piece(s) hits another contour.

! Note: The Alt+2 shortcut only works with the numeric keypad.

! Note: The arrows on the keyboard will move the piece in the selecteddirection 10 pixels at a time.

Adjust Up (Alt+8)

The Adjust Up arrow places and moves the selected piece(s) in the updirection until the piece(s) hits another contour.

Page 57: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 39

! Note: The Alt+8 shortcut only works with the numeric keypad.

! Note: The arrows on the keyboard will move the piece in the selecteddirection 10 pixels at a time.

Flip Y

The Flip Y tool allows the pattern piece to flip in the Y direction on the markerarea. This tool will not flip the piece if a one-way direction has been assignedor flipping has not been permitted in the Piece Info. Box under the PieceMenu.

Flip X

The Flip X tool allows the pattern piece to flip in the X direction on the markerarea.

Rotate by 90 Degrees

The Rotate by 90 Degrees rotates the selected piece(s) counter-clockwise eachtime it is selected. If the Limit Rotation command (in the Options menu) isenabled, the direction limits must allow the piece to rotate 90 degrees for therotation to take place.

Page 58: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual40

Rotate By 180 Degrees

The Rotate by 180 Degrees rotates the selected piece(s) counter-clockwiseeach time it is selected. If the Limit Rotation command (in the Options menu)is enabled, the direction limits must allow the piece to rotate 180 degrees forthe rotation to take place.

Rotate by Center

The Rotate from Center tool allows a selected piece(s) to be rotated from acenter point with the mouse. If the Limit Rotation command (in the Optionsmenu) is enabled, the direction limits must allow the piece to rotate for therotation to take place. If the Round after Rotation option in the Options menuis enabled, the piece will snap to the closest 90-degree angle (within 8degrees).

To Rotate from the Center of the Selected Piece:

35. Click the Rotate from Center tool.

36. Click the mouse on the desired piece and move the mouse in acircle. The piece will rotate on a pivot point that is located in thecenter of the selected piece.

Page 59: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 41

Rotate Piece

The Rotate from Specific Point tool allows a selected piece(s) to be rotatedwith the mouse. If the Limit Rotation command (in the Options menu) isenabled, the direction limits must allow the piece to rotate for the rotation totake place. If the Round after Rotation option in the Options menu is enabled,the piece will snap to the closest 90-degree angle (within 8 degrees).

To Rotate from a Specific Point On the Selected Piece(s):

37. Click the Rotate from Specific Point tool.

38. Click the mouse on the desired pivot point on the piece, movesthe mouse in a circle. The piece will rotate from the exact pointselected.

Adjust

Adjust places pieces in blank areas of the marker instead of using the manualdragging and dropping technique. This option takes into consideration all ofthe previously specified options like rotating, mirroring and so on. The size,position and number of angles a piece has contribute to the amount of time ittakes to Adjust the piece on screen.

To Adjust To the Nearest Piece Or Boundary:

39. Click the Adjust tool. (The Adjust tool remains enabled untilAdjust Rotate or Insert to Hole tool is selected.)

Page 60: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual42

40. Click the right mouse button on the piece(s) to Adjust.

! Tip: To select multiple pieces, click and drag a box around the desiredpieces, or click on the first piece and press and hold the Shift key toadd additional pieces to the group.

21. Drag the cursor to the area you would like the piece to be placed.

The piece will move to the desired location and “bump” against the first pieceor marker boundary it comes to.

Adjust Rotate

The Adjust Rotate tool is similar to the Adjust tool. It Adjust Rotate the pieceto get a tighter marker. If the Limit Rotation command in the Options menu isenabled, the Rotation Limits must also be defined in the Piece Info Dialogbox. The size, position and number of angles a piece has contribute to theamount of time it takes to Adjust the piece on screen.

To Adjust Rotate to the Nearest Piece or boundary:

41. Click the Adjust Rotate tool.

42. Click and drag the right mouse button on the selected piece(s) youwish to Adjust Rotate.

43. Drag the cursor to the area you would like the piece to be placed.

Page 61: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 43

Insert to Hole

The Insert to Hole tool is similar to the Adjust Rotate tool. It Jumps overplaced pieces and Rotates the piece to get a tighter marker. If the LimitRotation command in the Options menu is enabled, the Rotation Limits mustalso be defined in the Piece Info Dialog box. The size, position and number ofangles a piece has contribute to the amount of time it takes to Jump the pieceon screen.

Page 62: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual44

To Insert to Hole:

44. Click the Insert to Hole tool.

45. Click and drag the right mouse button on the selected piece(s) youwish to Insert to Hole.

46. Drag the cursor to the area you would like the piece to be placed.

Page 63: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 45

Alignment Toolbar

The Alignment Tools enable several pieces to align as a group on the marker.

Align Center

The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the marker area.

• Drag a box around the pieces to align. Or click on the pieces toalign while holding the Ctrl key.

• Click the Align Center icon.

! Note: Pieces that are beside each other on the marker will overlap whenaligned.

Align Left

The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piececlosest to the marker’s left boundary.

• Drag a box around the pieces to align. Or click on the pieces toalign while holding the Ctrl key.

• Click the Align Left icon.

Page 64: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual46

! Note: Pieces that are beside each other on the marker will overlap whenaligned.

Align Right

The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piececlosest to the marker’s right boundary.

• Drag a box around the pieces to align. Or click on the pieces toalign while holding the Ctrl key.

• Click the Align Right icon

! Note: Pieces that are beside each other on the marker will overlap whenaligned.

Align to Top

The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piececlosest to the top of the marker area.

• Drag a box around the pieces to align. Or click on the pieces toalign while holding the Ctrl key.

• Click the Align Left icon.

Page 65: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 47

Align to Bottom

The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piececlosest to the bottom of the marker area.

• Drag a box around the pieces to align. Or click on the pieces toalign while holding the Ctrl key.

• Click the Align Left icon.

Align Horizontally

The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piececlosest to the Left boundary of the marker area.

• Drag a box around the pieces to align. Or click on the pieces toalign while holding the Ctrl key.

• Click the Align Left icon.

Align Vertically

The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piececlosest to the Left boundary of the marker area.

Page 66: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual48

• Drag a box around the pieces to align. Or click on the pieces toalign while holding the Ctrl key.

• Click the Align Left icon.

Page 67: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 49

Placement Toolbar:

Place (CTRL+P)

Use this command to place the selected piece or pieces on the marker area.

• Hold down the Shift key, select the pieces you wish to place.

• Select Place Selected Pieces/Place or select CTRL+P

! Note: There is a difference between placing the pieces with CTRL+Pcommand and placing the pieces with the Double Click command.

Place One Bundle

Use this command to place one set or bundle of the selected piece or piecesonto the marker area.

• Hold down the Shift key, select the pieces you wish to place.

• Select Place Selected Pieces/Place One Set or selectCTRL+SHIFT+P

Page 68: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual50

Place All

Use this command to place all of the selected pieces onto the selected area.

• Hold down the Shift key, select the pieces you wish to place.

• Select Place Selected Pieces/Place All or selectCTRL+SHIFT+ALT+P

Place Folded Left

This command is used to fold a piece in half and then place it along the leftedge of the marker boundary. Place Folded Left can only be used on Faced orFolded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed in the right/left.

• In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece you wish to fold alongthe left boundary of the marker.

• Select Place Selected Pieces/Place Folded Left from the Markermenu. The piece will be placed along the left boundary.

• OPTONAL: Rather than follow the instructions defined in stepnumber two, place your cursor in the desired location on the leftedge of the marker boundary, hold down the L key and doubleclick the left mouse button. The piece will be placed along the leftboundary of the marker.

Page 69: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 51

! Note: Once the piece is placed, the bump tools can be used to move thepieces around on the marker boundary. To unfold a piece, simplyreturn the piece to the Piece Display Bar.

! Tip: To define a marker as Faced or Folded refer to the MARKERDEFINITIONS command in the Marker menu. To define a piece withfolding allowed refers to the INFO or ALL SIZES INFO commands inthe Piece menu.

Place Folded Right

This command is used to fold a piece in half and then place it along the rightedge of the marker boundary. Place Folded Right can only be used on Faced orFolded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed in the right/left.

• In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece you wish to fold alongthe right boundary of the marker.

• Select Place Selected Pieces/Place Folded Right from the Markermenu. The piece will be placed along the right boundary.

• OPTONAL: Rather than follow the instructions defined in stepnumber two, place your cursor in the desired location on the rightedge of the marker boundary, hold down the R key and doubleclick the left mouse button. The piece will be placed along theright boundary of the marker.

! Note: Once the piece is placed, the bump tools can be used to move thepieces around on the marker boundary. To unfold a piece, simplyreturn the piece to the Piece Display Bar.

Page 70: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual52

! Tip: To define a marker as Faced or Folded refer to the MARKERDEFINITIONS command in the Marker menu. To define a piece withfolding allowed refers to the INFO or ALL SIZES INFO commands inthe Piece menu.

Place Folded Up

This command is used to fold a piece in half and then place it along the upperedge of the marker boundary. Place Folded Up can only be used on Tubular orFolded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed in the up/down.

• In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece you wish to fold alongthe upper boundary of the marker.

• Select Place Selected Pieces/Place Folded Up from the Markermenu. The piece will be placed along the upper boundary.

• OPTONAL: Rather than follow the instructions defined in stepnumber two, place your cursor in the desired location on theupper edge of the marker boundary, hold down the U key anddouble click the left mouse button. The piece will be placed alongthe upper boundary of the marker.

! Note: Once the piece is placed, the bump tools can be used to move thepieces around on the marker boundary. To unfold a piece, simpilyreturn the piece to the Piece Display Bar.

! Tip: To define a marker as Tubular or Folded refer to the MARKERDEFINITIONS command in the Marker menu. To define a piece withfolding allowed refers to the INFO or ALL SIZES INFO commands inthe Piece menu.

Page 71: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 53

Place Folded Down

This command is used to fold a piece in half and then place it along the loweredge of the marker boundary. Place Folded Down can only be used on Tubularor Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed in the up/down.

• In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece you wish to fold alongthe lower boundary of the marker.

• Select Place Selected Pieces/Place Folded Down from the Markermenu. The piece will be placed along the lower boundary.

• OPTONAL: Rather than follow the instructions defined in stepnumber two, place your cursor in the desired location on thelower edge of the marker boundary, hold down the D key anddouble click the left mouse button. The piece will be placed alongthe lower boundary of the marker.

! Note: Once the piece is placed, the bump tools can be used to move thepieces around on the marker boundary. To unfold a piece, simplyreturn the piece to the Piece Display Bar.

! Tip: To define a marker as Tubular or Folded refer to the MARKERDEFINITIONS command in the Marker menu. To define a piece withfolding allowed refers to the INFO or ALL SIZES INFO commands inthe Piece menu.

Page 72: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual54

Place Left Up

This command is used to fold a piece in quarters and place it in the upper leftcorner of the marker boundary. Place Left Up can only be used on Foldedmarkers and on pieces defined with folding allowed in the up/down andleft/right.

In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece you wish to fold into quarters andplace in the upper left corner of the marker boundary.

Select Place Selected Pieces/Place Left Up from the Marker menu. The piecewill be placed in the upper left corner of the marker boundary.

OPTONAL: Rather than follow the instructions defined in step number two,place your cursor in the upper left corner of the marker boundary, hold downthe Home key (located on the numeric keypad) and double click the left mousebutton. The piece will be placed in the upper left corner of the markerboundary.

! Note: Once the piece is placed, the bump tools can be used to move thepieces around on the marker boundary. To unfold a piece, simplyreturn the piece to the Piece Display Bar.

! Tip: To define a marker as Tubular or Folded refer to the MARKERDEFINITIONS command in the Marker menu. To define a piece withfolding allowed refer to the INFO or ALL SIZES INFO commands inthe Piece menu.

Page 73: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 55

Place Left Down

This command is used to fold a piece in quarters and place it in the lower leftcorner of the marker boundary. Place Left Down can only be used on Foldedmarkers and on pieces defined with folding allowed in the up/down andleft/right.

In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece you wish to fold into quarters andplace in the lower left corner of the marker boundary.

Select Place Selected Pieces/Place Left Up from the Marker menu. The piecewill be placed in the lower left corner of the marker boundary.

OPTONAL: Rather than follow the instructions defined in step number two,place your cursor in the lower left corner of the marker boundary, hold downthe End key (located on the numeric keypad) and double click the left mousebutton. The piece will be placed in the lower left corner of the markerboundary.

! Note: Once the piece is placed, the bump tools can be used to move thepieces around on the marker boundary. To unfold a piece, simplyreturn the piece to the Piece Display Bar.

! Tip: To define a marker as Tubular or Folded refer to the MARKERDEFINITIONS command in the Marker menu. To define a piece withfolding allowed refers to the INFO or ALL SIZES INFO commands inthe Piece menu.

Page 74: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual56

Place Right Up

This command is used to fold a piece in quarters and place it in the upper rightcorner of the marker boundary. Place Right Up can only be used on Foldedmarkers and on pieces defined with folding allowed in the up/down andleft/right.

• In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece you wish to fold intoquarters and place in the upper right corner of the markerboundary.

• Select Place Selected Pieces/Place Right Up from the Markermenu. The piece will be placed in the upper right corner of themarker boundary.

• OPTONAL: Rather than follow the instructions defined in stepnumber two, place your cursor in the upper right corner of themarker boundary, hold down the Page UP key (located on thenumeric keypad) and double click the left mouse button. Thepiece will be placed in the upper right corner of the markerboundary.

! Note: Once the piece is placed, the bump tools can be used to move thepieces around on the marker boundary. To unfold a piece, simplyreturn the piece to the Piece Display Bar.

! Tip: To define a marker as Tubular or Folded refer to the MARKERDEFINITIONS command in the Marker menu. To define a piece withfolding allowed refers to the INFO or ALL SIZES INFO commands inthe Piece menu.

Page 75: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 57

Place Right Down

This command is used to fold a piece in quarters and place it in the lower rightcorner of the marker boundary. Place Right Down can only be used on Foldedmarkers and on pieces defined with folding allowed in the up/down andleft/right.

In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece you wish to fold into quarters andplace in the lower right corner of the marker boundary.

Select Place Selected Pieces/Place Right Down from the Marker menu. Thepiece will be placed in the lower right corner of the marker boundary.

OPTONAL: Rather than follow the instructions defined in step number two,place your cursor in the lower right corner of the marker boundary, hold downthe Page Down key (located on the numeric keypad) and double click the leftmouse button. The piece will be placed in the lower right corner of the markerboundary.

! Note: Once the piece is placed, the bump tools can be used to move thepieces around on the marker boundary. To unfold a piece, simplyreturn the piece to the Piece Display Bar.

! Tip: To define a marker as Tubular or Folded refer to the MARKERDEFINITIONS command in the Marker menu. To define a piece withfolding allowed refers to the INFO or ALL SIZES INFO commands inthe Piece menu.

Page 76: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual58

Group Toolbar:

Keep

This command will group selected pieces together and allow for placement ofadditional pieces exactly the same as the “kept” group. This option is helpfulwhen nesting pieces according to sets.

To Keep a Group

• Create a group.

• From the GROUPING menu choose KEEP.

The grouped pieces will be displayed with a dashed line around them, and thepieces will also be displayed in their own group on the Piece Display Bar. Thisgroup can be placed and manipulated on the marker as if it were a single piece.

! Tip: After placing a “kept” group, the pieces will move as a group until adifferent piece is selected or another group is placed.

Ungroup

Choose the Ungroup command to release “kept” pieces. Once the Ungroupcommand is selected, the group will no longer be displayed in the Piece

Page 77: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 59

Display Bar. The individual pieces will remain in their original Piece DisplayBoxes.

Fix on Marker

Select the Fix On Marker command to permanently group pieces. The pieceswill appear to be “frozen” in the selected group until they are released withone of the Unfix commands. Anytime any part of the fixed group is selected,the whole group will be highlighted and will move as a single object.

To Fix a Group on the Marker

• Create a group.

• From the GROUPING menu choose FIX ON MARKER

Unfix Selected

All pieces that were in the selected group will be released and can be placedindividually.

To Unfix a Selected Group on the Marker:

Select the group, groups you want to release.

From the GROUPING menu choose UNFIX SELECTED

Page 78: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual60

Unfix All

Select the Unfix All command to release the entire “fixed” group of pieces. All“fixed” groups will be released and the pieces will move individually.

Stripe Adjust Group

This command is used to ensure that if piece is re-positioned within the floral,stripe, or plaid marker area, the piece will match to the other placed pieces.

To Create a Stripe Adjust Group:

• Position the pieces that relate to one another on the marker area.

• Select the group of pieces.

• From the GROUPING menu choose Stripe Adjust Group. If anyof the Stripe Adjust Group pieces are moved, the moved piecewill always snap to a similar location

Rectangular Block Fuse

This tool is used to create separate Fusing (Cutting) zones. It enables toeliminate certain zones on the marker from being cut.

To Create Rectangular Block Fuse

• Click and drag a box around the area you want to create a blockfuse from.

Page 79: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 61

• Choose from “Grouping” menu “Block Fuse” option.

Only pieces that were marked entirely in the box would be included in theblock.

! Note: Block fuse will be disabled to a folded piece.

A “All nested pieces” will plot all the pieces with the drawn blocks.

A “Marker without blocks” will plot the marker without the blocks.

A “Marker with block spaces” will plot the marker with block spaces.

“Contain all blocks” will plot only the contents of the blocks.

Thrifty Block Fuse

This feature enables the user to create a "thrifty" block fusing as opposed to arectangle block fusing; this limits fabric waste and the user can still create ablock fusing on selected pieces.

To Create Thrifty Block Fuse:

• Click and drag a box around the area you want to create a thriftyblock fuse from.

• Choose from “Grouping” menu “Thrifty Fuse” option. Onlypieces that were marked entirely in the box would be included inthe block.

Page 80: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual62

! Note: Thrifty fuse will be disabled to a folded piece.

Select Whole Bundle

This command enables the user to select a complete bundle by selecting anypiece within the bundle

Unify Pieces Orientation

This command enables the user to unify piece orientations within bundleaccording to one selected piece orientation within the bundle.

Page 81: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 63

General Toolbar

Piece Info (Ctrl+I)

This command is used to verify, update and change all text and parameters ofthe selected piece and size. The Piece Information includes the style and piecename, code, description, number of copies and current plies, remainders,buffering information, area and perimeter measurements, priority in autonesting, orientation of the piece, rotation limits, locked piece and flippinginformation.

All Sizes Info

This option enables you to simultaneously set attributes for all sizes of aselected piece.

To Set All Sizes Info:

• From the PIECE menu choose ALL SIZES INFO. The All SizesInformation dialog box will be displayed.

• Enter the desired values.

• Click Apply next to each changed value.

Page 82: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual64

Global Info

The Global Info controls information settings for all sizes or specific sizes onall pieces or specific pieces in the marker.

! Tip: The Global Info command enables you to manipulate piece(s) attributesin the size level. You may also see the net weight and the net area of apiece, and calculate gross values per size using the Optimum Areaoption in the Marker menu.

To Set Global Info for all Sizes on All Pieces:

• From the PIECE menu choose GLOBAL INFO.... The GlobalPieces Info dialog box will be displayed.

• Change the value(s) of the chosen attribute(s).

• Click Apply to each changed value.

To Specify Settings For the Selected Size on Selected Pieces

• Hold down the Shift key and select the pieces of your choice inthe Piece Display Bar.

• In the Global Info dialog box, enable the Settings For SelectedPieces Only and the Settings for Selected Sizes Only options.

• Select the size for which you want to assign a setting.

• Enter the specifications for that size. Be sure to select SET afterchanging each specification/option.

Page 83: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 65

• Continue selecting the sizes you want to change, or click CLOSEto exit the Global Information dialog box.

Marker Definitions (Ctrl+M)

Use this command to specify or change options related to the current marker,including the marker size, selvages and the fabric spreading method.

To Apply Marker Definitions:

• From the MARKER menu choose MARKER DEFINITIONS.The Marker Definitions dialog box will be displayed.

• Select the desired options.

• Enter the desired information.

• Click OK.

Display Pieces on Marker

Select the Display Pieces on Marker command to determine the specificinformation that will be displayed on screen and output with the file. Sincemost of the output options will perform the output according to theinformation displayed on screen (WYSIWYG, What You See Is What YouGet), it is important to control all of the different elements.

Page 84: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual66

To Display Pieces on Marker:

• From the OPTIONS menu choose DISPLAY PIECES ONMARKER.... The Display Pieces on Marker dialog box will bedisplayed.

• Select the desired options.

• Click OK.

The selected information will be displayed on screen and output with the file

! Note: If there is an x in the box to the left of the option, it is selected and willbe displayed on screen and will output with the file. Click once toplace an x or select the option, click again to remove it.

Placement on Marker

The “Placement on marker” gives you the location of your selected piece bycoordinates:

In the x description there are: left, center and right, you can move your piece

Horizontally by entering a new coordinate value to one of the three windows.

In the y description there are: top, center and bottom, you can move your piece

Page 85: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 67

Vertically by entering a new coordinate value to one of the three windows.

Stripe Definition

This command is used to define stripes, plaids, or floral prints on the marker,simulating a repeated design. The Stripe Definition option is used when youare marking material with a special design that must appear on the piece in aspecific place. It ensures that your piece will be cut correctly with the repeateddesign.

! Note: The auto-nesting procedure does not take the Stripe Definition optioninto account.

To Define Stripes:

• From the MARKER menu choose STRIPE DEFINITION... TheStripes Definitions dialog box will be displayed.

• Verify or change the selected parameters.

• Click OK.

! Note: Select the Hide Stripes option in the Options menu to display only afraction of the horizontal and vertical lines around the border of themarker. For some this is more visually appealing and easier to workwith.

To Add or Edit Stripe Adjust Notches or Buttons:

Decide which pieces in your DSN file match.

Mark the match point on the pieces with notches or buttons.

Page 86: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual68

The Notches and Buttons must be assigned Stripe Adjust numbers. To ensurethat all future markers receive the same stripes adjust numbers, it is best tomake the notch and button edits in OptiGrade. If the attributes were notspecified with OptiGrade, you can use the Notch icon to edit the stripe adjustnumber in OptiMark.

Numbers 1 through 4 can be used for stripe adjust numbers. The match pointsthat line up must be assigned the same stripe adjust number and notch orbutton type. For example, if the side seams of the front and back should lineup, add the same type of notch on both pieces in the matching location, andassign a stripe adjust number of one. If the front has a patch pocket that linesup on the right side, add a button to the front and to the pocket, and assign astripe adjust number of one or two.

When the first piece is placed in the marker, the second piece will look at thefirst piece to determine where it needs to be located. All pieces placed on themarker that have the same notch number will be placed at the samecoordinates of each repeated stripe as the first piece.

When stripe adjust according to sets is disabled, the next bundle placed willmatch in the same way that the previous bundle of the same size matched.When stripe adjust according to sets in enabled, the next bundle placed willmatch any way that the user requests. If stripe adjust according to sets inenabled and the first bundle placed was related to Stripes, the next bundleplaced will match in the same way that the previous bundle of the same sizematched.

You cannot have several like notches with the same stripe numbers on thesame piece. You can have different notches (V, U’s etc.) with the same stripenumbers on the same piece.

Page 87: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 69

Note: Matching points can also be defined using the Fabric and Stripescommand in OptiGrade.

Note: If you would like the stripe adjust point (notch or button) to match to aparticular stripe junction, follow the To Relate Pieces (With StripeAdjust Notches Or Buttons) To A Stripe instructions later in thischapter.

Detect Intersections

When this option is disabled, the marker will be plotted exactly as it appearson the screen. When this option is enabled, OptiMark will check the markerfor overlapping pieces. A message will be displayed if any are found.

AutoNesting Setup

The ‘Auto Nest Setup’ enables you to select one way of nesting option fromseveral options. It is also possible to create a list of markers to nest and test theresults with different material width. A comparison table will be created forverification purposes.

The Standard is a more simple but yet sophisticated way of nesting with twooptions: ‘Quick’ (when the Quick is marked) and slower one. The slower waywill bring better results but will take longer time.

Nest++ is an optional add-on application to OptiTex Mark with fantasticresults. The efficiency is based on the duration that the automatic algorithmwill run. The average time needed to get a good nest should last about 15

Page 88: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual70

minutes for a marker with 50 to 80 pieces. A good nesting can be reached alsoafter 2 or 3 minutes.

Page 89: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 71

Chapter 3: File Menu

The File menu includes commands that enable you to Open, Save, Print, Plot,Import and Export files. From the File menu you will control most of yourinput and output options.

To select one of the File commands, choose the command from the file menu,press the Shortcut Key (listed in parentheses), or click the icon.

New (Ctrl+N)

This command resets the screen and clears all current pieces and marker datafrom memory. It is used to create a new marker file.

To Create a New File:

From the File Menu select New or press Ctrl+N.

If there is a file currently open, a dialog box will be displayed asking you tosave the current file or cancel the command. An empty OptiTex Mark screenand the Marker Definitions dialog box will be displayed. See the Markermenu for more information on the Marker Definitions dialog box.

Open Marker File (Ctrl + O)

Select Open Marker File from the File Menu to open an existing Marker file.A Marker file has a DSP extension, which stands for Display File. A Markerfile is usually based on Style (DSN) files, which comes from OptiTex PDS orgrading application. Another sources for markers are those that are importedfrom other CAD/CAM applications. The Marker File can consist of one ormore DSN or imported files and can contain both placed and unplaced pieces.

Page 90: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel72

When opening a Marker file, you can enable a verification option from the‘Preference’ command list, which is called: ‘Check style file before opening’.This option verifies that the original source design (DSN) file used to createthe current Marker file didn’t change in the meantime, and that it still exists inthe same place. If something did change, there will be an error message.

OptiTex Mark remembers the last directory where you have saved your DSNor DSP files, and it will become the default drive for opening and saving allother files.

Open Marker Dialog Box:

Open a Marker File from the Current Directory:

• From the File Menu select Open Marker File or press CTRL + O.The Open Marker File dialog box is displayed.

• Select the desired DSP file from the File Name list box.

• Press Enter or click OPEN.

Page 91: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 73

! Tip: If you double click (press left mouse button twice quickly) on a filename, OptiTex Mark will select the file and open it.

Open a Marker File From Another Directory:

• From the File Menu select Open Marker File or press CTRL + O.The Open Marker File dialog box is displayed.

• From the Look In list, double click the first option (usually C:\). Alist of directories is displayed.

• Double click the desired directory. A list of DSP files will bedisplayed in the File Name List Box (if any exist).

• Select the desired file from the File Name List box.

• Click OK.

! Note: On Windows platforms, you can see Marker Preview on the righthand side of the Open Marker dialog box

Merge Several Markers

This function merges two markers side by side or one over the other. Thedefault is side by side. To select Merge Above, select Preferences from theOptions Menu and enable Merge Marker Above to the Current.

! Note: If the width and number of layers are not identical in the two markerfiles, OptiTex Mark determines and sets the values as follows:

• OptiTex Mark selects the wider value between the loaded markers.

• OptiTex Mark selects the current number of layers (not the numberin the file you are loading).

Page 92: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel74

Prepare both markers separately on their actual Marker size and by using theMerge Few Markers command, the second Marker will be added to the first.The second Marker will merge at the end of the first one.

To Merge Marker Files:

• From the File Menu choose Merge Few Markers. The Open MarkerFile dialog box is displayed.

• Select the desired DSP file from the File Name list box.

! Tip: Double click the file name to quickly open it.

• Click OK. The selected maker will be added to the end of your openMarker file.

! Tip: By default the merged marker will be placed to the right of the openmarker. If you want the merged marker to be above, go to the‘Preference’ command under ‘Options Menu’ and enable ‘MergeMarker above the current’.

History

The History command enables the user to save additional information witheach Marker file. This information enables the user to follow up or to retrievethe positioning of a file at a specific point of time. This allows the company tocreate a History Log for each Marker and track the changes to a file accordingto dates. Two options are offered. One enables the user to add text descriptionto the file, The second option enables the user to make a file generation withthe ‘Save Version’ command allowing the possibility in the future to retrievethe file layout at certain stages in the design process.

Page 93: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 75

To Enable the History Command:

1. Select History from the File Menu and activate (check)Automatically Save History on Close.

2. Click the Close button to leave the History dialog box.

3. The Save History dialog will open on every Save command.Comments may be typed in addition to saving the file with all theinformation as it is at the moment of the Save command.

To Save History:

• The History dialog box is displayed when a file is saved.

• The date and user name is automatically noted.

Page 94: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel76

• Type comments in the comment field.

• OPTIONAL: Save graphic information by activating (checking) theStore Version field.

• Click OK.

At any point History may be selected from the File Menu to view anycomments attached to the file. Delete messages by clicking the Delete button.

! Note: If a specific layout is saved with the file, the size of the file is going tobe much larger and might cause a delay during File Open. Do notsave information that will not be used, or delete it before the finalsave.

Page 95: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 77

Open Style File

The Open Style File command is used to create a new marker. It can also beused to add or merge several design or style files into an existing Marker File(DSP). It loads a style (DSN) file containing pieces that match the currentmaterial type to make a marker, and allows you to define the following:Quantities per size, Attributes for material type, Rotate directions andQuantities of pieces per set.

This is the place to make last minute changes in the marker order. Values canbe redefined and the changes will be good only for the current marker.

OptiTex Mark remembers the last directory where you have saved your DSNor DSP files, and it will always become the default drive for Open and save.

Open a Style File:

4. From the File Menu select Open Style File. The Select Style Filedialog box is displayed.

5. Choose from cutting contour only, sewing contour only, or bothcontours.

6. Click Browse. A second Select Style File dialog box is displayed.

7. Select the desired .DSN file from the File Name list box and clickOpen. The Order For Marker Making dialog box is displayed.

Page 96: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel78

OPTIONAL: To look in a different directory, double clicks the first optionfrom the Look In list (usually C:\). A list of directories is displayed. Choosethe directory and file that you wish to open. Click Open. The Order ForMarker Making dialog box is displayed.

! Note: the PASTE button is enable only when there is style file copied to theWindows clipboard.

• To edit martial field and number of set double click on the file namein the “Selected files” window. The ORDER TO MARKERMAKING dialog box.

Page 97: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 79

• Enter the material type in the Material field.

• Enter number of set to each size if necessary.

• Click on the Piece Info tab to display the pieces parameters.

Page 98: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel80

Piece Info Tab:

Material

The material type must be entered for the selected design file. . Only the piecesin the defined material type will be loaded into the marker. A zero (0) valuefor the material type will load all material types. If nothing is entered in the

Page 99: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 81

material type, an error message will be displayed as a reminder. If nothing isentered it will be recognized as (0) and all material types will be loaded.

Piece Name

The piece information displayed on the right side of the dialog box is takenfrom the Info. in the DSN file (created in OptiGrade or OptiDig). Highlight thepiece you wish to edit and a picture with information about the highlightedpiece will be displayed. If you change the piece information at marker makingtime, the changes are only made to this particular marker. To ensure that thepiece information is the same in all future markers, it is best to change the Infoin the DSN file.

Code

The Code field is used to define a piece code. This field can be used to definea serial number or perhaps a code number that lets you know the type of piece.It is another area to define unique information about this piece. To display thecode name on nested pieces, enable the Display Pieces on Marker option in theOptions menu.

Description

The Description can include a name for the piece or a full explanation of theselected piece. To display the Description on nested pieces, enable the DisplayPieces on Marker option in the Options menu.

Quantity per Set

The Quantity per Set defines the number of copies to be nested on the marker.The number will be displayed as a counter in the size list. As nesting proceeds,the quantity will decrease until all pieces have been nested or when the markerbecomes full. Any pattern with a 0 quantity value in OptiGrade will not beread by the OptiMark nesting application

Page 100: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel82

Import From Excel

In Optitex 8.0 an order to marker making can be edit in Excel document. Toimport the data from the Excel sheet click on the “Import From Excel “ buttonand locate the desire excel file.

Export to Excel

In Optitex 8.0 an order to marker making can be edit in Excel document. Toexport the data from the Dialog box to Excel file click on the “Report to Excelfile” and refine the data that will be stored on the excel worksheet.

• Click OK to place the files in the Selected Files field of the SelectStyle Files dialog box.

! Tip: To merge additional files to the existing DSP file, use this sameprocedure starting from step #2.

• Click OK to open all files appearing in the Selected Style Filesdialog box. The pieces are displayed at the top of the Marker in thePiece Display Bar.

Import from SGS Modulate

Modulate maintains a database of Parametric Patterns.

This command display the Modulate Server window, from which you canselect one or more patterns that have been assigned specific dimension values.

To Import CUS file:

• From the “Select style file” dialog box click on the “IMPORTFROM SGS MODULATE” button.

• Browse the database to locate the desire Modulate file.

Page 101: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 83

• Change the dimension value if necessary.

• From the FILE menu select LOAD FILE.

! Note: All new DSP files are loaded untitled. To save the file with a specificfile name, use the Save As command in the File menu.

! Tip: To equal all the sizes quantity to all sizes click on the right button ofyour mouse while you pointing on the sets quantity field to display apopup menu. From this menu select “equal all “.

Page 102: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel84

File Finder

Find and Update command

This application finds Marker (DSP) files and pieces in OptiTex Mark. Afterfinding, the file can be opened or updated according to the style file.

In order to use the Find and Update application select the File Findercommand from the File menu.

! Note: The Find and Update application is also available in OptiTex PDS.

Find

After setting all search parameters, click on the Find button. The found itemswill display at the bottom of the dialog box. There are two items that can befound – Marker Files or Pieces in a Style File.

These two choices affect what will display in the list of found items at thebottom of the dialog box. For example, a search for pieces with a namebeginning with “BA” with the selected item to find as Piece will result in a listof all files containing pieces with a name beginning with “BA” . The same filemight be listed a few times, because it has several pieces beginning with amatching name. If the item to find is a Marker File, the file will display onlyonce even though it has several pieces with a matching name.

Page 103: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 85

Find and Update Dialog Boxes:

Page 104: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel86

! Note: Click on small arrow with the mouse left click to open a drop listprevious fields names or use the mouse right button to open utility boxfor editing the previous fields names list:

Find Tab:

The main function of the Find Tab is to look for Marker (DSP) files accordingto the OptiTex application it is launched from. When working from the Markapplication, it will manage Marker Files and Pieces within the Marker Files.While looking for a Marker file in the OptiTex Mark application, the Finddialog box enables the user to input further search filters, such as Style name,Piece name, Material type, Piece Description, etc.

Search Options:

Marker File

Type a file name to search for specific Marker Files by file name.

Look in

This field defines the scope of the search to specific directories or subdirectories.

Page 105: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 87

Show file name only

Once the Show File Name Only is checked, the finder will look only for*.DSP file. Otherwise, when unchecked, the finder will look for pieces from*.DSP files.

! Note: Whenever this command is unchecked, “Replace Piece” and “DeletePiece” in the Update property page will be enabled and vice versa.

Look in sub folders

This option extends the search to sub folders.

Filters:

Piece Name filter

Use this option as a filter. Types a piece name to limit the search to files thatcontain a specific piece.

Piece Code filter

Use this option as a filter. Type a piece code to limit the search to files thatcontain a specific piece code.

Piece Description filter

Use this option as a filter. Type a piece description to limit the search to filesthat contain a specific piece description.

Material filter

Use this option as a filter. Type a material to limit the search to files thatcontain a specific material.

Page 106: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel88

Style Name filter

Use this option as a filter. Type a Style Name to limit the search to a specificstyle name.

Match case

When this option is selected the program will find only files that match thecase of the characters in the piece name, style name, file name and materialexactly. Otherwise, the command will finds files with either uppercase orlowercase characters that match the characters in the piece name, style filename and material strings.

Match whole word only

When this option is selected the program will find only files that match thespecified piece name, style name, file name and material with no extracharacters. Otherwise, the command matches any string, whether it is afragment of a larger string or not.

Options:

Find now

Click this button to activate the search process.

Open file

Click this button to open the selected files in the OptiTex Mark program.

Automatic Update Marker

Click this button to automatically update piece information in the Marker filefrom the Style file. This update can be activated on one or more selected files.Check the Confirm Save check box if you want to confirm manually the

Page 107: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 89

saving operation of each marker file.During the automatic operation you can use the Stop button to stop theoperation.

Confirm Save

Check the Confirm Save check box if you want to confirm manually thesaving operation of each marker file after Automatic Update.

Update Piece Parameters

Select Cutting Contour Only, Sewing Contour Only, or Both Contours tospecify what seam to work on. Often in Mark, only the Cutting Contour isneeded.

Select All

Click this button to select all the files in the current file list.

Stop

Click this button to halt the search operation and return control to the user.

Maximize

Click this button to enlarge the Find & Update dialog box to maximum size.

Cancel

Click this button to quit Find and return to the host application.

Select Tab:

The Select Tab enables you to select and mark the chosen or current piece tocopy or replace in to other files. Click the Get Style File button to access the

Page 108: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel90

Style Files used in the Marker file that is currently marked in the search list (Itwill be in Gray color). The piece names and pieces will display. The Openbutton will prompt the standard Open dialog to open a Style File. The piecenames and pieces will display. The Open option enables you to open any file,even if it is not in the File list.

Page 109: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 91

Options:

Get Style File

Click this button to load the selected style file from the file list. The selectedfile will be the source file.

Open

Click this button to open a style file.

Update Tab

The Update tab is used in connection with the Select tab. Files may beupdated by adding a piece to a file, replacing a piece in a file, or updating anexisting piece in a file. Multiple files may be selected from the File list to beupdated

To Add a Piece:

• First select the target files in the File list.

• Select a piece in the source file by using the Select Tab.

• Click on the Add Piece button.

• The piece from the source file is added to the target file or files inthe File list.

Repeat as above for Replace Piece and Delete Piece clicking on theappropriate buttons.

! Note: The Update tab can not be used until a source file has been chosenusing the Select Tab.

Page 110: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel92

Add Piece

Click on this button to add the selected piece in the Select Tab to the currentMarker File, selected in the File list.

Page 111: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 93

Replace Piece

Click on this button to replace the selected piece in the Select Tab for the piecein the current Marker File, selected in the File list.

Delete Piece

Click on this button to delete the piece selected in the file selected in the Filelist.

Report Tab

The Report Tab prepares a report describing the contents of one or more DSPin ASCII (.txt.) format. This report can be imported into applications such asWord, Excel, Lotus and Access, for editing and/or printing.

Append File

When the Append File checkbox is selected, the report will be added to theend of an existing report file, rather than create a new file.

Report File Name

This field is used to specify a new file name for the created report, or choosean existing file name for appending the report.

Report to Data Base

Click this button to create a report from the currently selected style file andthen, save it under the specified file name.

Report to Printer

Click this button to print a report from the currently selected style file ormarker file.

Page 112: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel94

Page 113: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 95

Save (Ctrl + S)

Use the Save command to save the current .DSP (marker) file. The Savecommand will save the file displayed on screen to the current path under thecurrent name. If you are saving the file for the first time, use the Save Ascommand.

! Note: The DSP extension will be added to the file name automatically. InWindows 95 or NT the file name can be longer then 8 alphanumericalcharacters.

OptiTex Mark remembers the last directory where you have saved your DSNor DSP files, and it will always become the default drive for Open and Save.

To Save a File:

From the File Menu select Save.

If the file has already been saved, OptiTex Mark will save the file with thecurrent file name in the already specified drive and directory. To make sureyou are saving with the correct options, choose the Save As command.

Save As

Use the Save As command to save a file for the first time or to ensure thecorrect file name and path are specified.

To Use the Save as Command:

• From the File Menu select Save As. The Save As dialog box will bedisplayed.

• Enter the file name.

Page 114: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel96

• OPTIONAL: Select a different drive or directory to save your file.

• Click OK.

! Note: The DSP extension will be added to the file name automatically.

Save As Dialog Box:

File Name

The File Name field remains empty until a file name is typed. The file typewill default to DSP unless a different file format has been selected. The FileList field displays the DSP files that exist in the current directory. If there ismore information than what fits in the current file list box, use the scroll barsto scroll up and down the list.

Page 115: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 97

Save as Type

This drop down box determines what types of files will be displayed, it shouldsay Marker Files (*.DSP) in the Save As Type box.

Attach Preview

A Preview Image is attached to each Marker File. The Default image to beattached is always the arrangement of the Marker that was on the working areawhile the file was saved.

Save in OptiTex-7 Format

Allows you to save the file in Version 7.XX.

Save Current Nesting

The Save Current Nesting command is used when necessary to divide oneorder into several markers. Examples of why the entire order cannot be cutout of one marker are when the fabric can only be spread so long due toshading, limitations of spreading tables, or the fabric is sold in sheets.

When one marker is full, use ‘Save Current Nesting’ to save it to a file. Amarker is considered full when no additional pieces can be placed within themarker limit. The marker limit is defined in the Marker Definitions commandin the Marker menu. During the Save Current Nesting the new marker will begiven a name that is similar to the initial file name, but the last two letters willbe changed to a dash (-) and a number.

For example, if the original file is titled Marker.dsp, all overflow files will begiven the name(s) Marker-1.dsp, Marker-2.dsp and so on.

There are two options with the Save Current Nesting command.

A. Save the placed (full) marker with all the unplaced pieces listed

Page 116: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel98

in the Piece Display Bar. The new unplaced marker will also listthe unplaced pieces in the Piece Display Bar.

B. Save the placed (full) marker with zero remainders listed in thePiece Display Bar. Only the new unplaced marker will list theunplaced pieces in the Piece Display Bar.

! Note: The same option exists in the Nesting menu with the AutoSave Save ofMarkers command.

To Save the Current Nesting

• From the File Menu select Save Current Nesting. The Save CurrentNesting dialog box is displayed.

• Enter the name you wish to save the file as.

• Click OK.

! Tip: If the original marker was saved with zero remainders, the originalremainders can be updated. Select Open Design Files from the File menu,double click on each of the Design files listed and select OK.

Page 117: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 99

Save Current Nesting Dialog Box:

Browse

Click on the Browse button to specify a name for the original DSP (marker)file. The additional DSP files will have the same name followed by a hyphenand a number.

Write Reports to File

Enabling this option will allow the marker information to be reported to thelog file each time a marker is saved or plotted. Click on Change Log tospecify a name for the ASCII log file.

Create NST-file (cncKad)

NST is one of the file formats that are used in the “cncKad” system. Byenabling this command, a NST file will automatically be created each time theDSP file is saved.

Page 118: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel100

Save only nested parts (and zero remainders)

When this command is enabled, the original marker will be saved with zeroremainders, only the new marker will have the unplaced pieces listed in thePiece Display Bar.

Export to CAD/CAM Files

The Export CAD/CAM file format command converts SGS files to any of theother graphic standard file formats listed in the dialog box.

Use the Layers table to define which items should be exported to which layer.The exported file is created using the working units defined in the OptionMenu.

To Export Files:

• From the File Menu select Export to CAD/CAM Files. The Exportto CAD/CAM File dialog box is displayed.

• Type in the name of the file to be exported.

• Click Browse to select drive and directory where the file is to beexported.

• Select the desired file format.

! Note: SGS software recognizes only the basic attributes of the differentASCII geometry standards for each file format. Situations may arisewhere the saved file does not appear exactly as it did in the originalapplication. The same limitation exists with the Import CAD/CAMfiles command. If the file is not importable, uses Import setup andchange the parameters accordingly.

• OPTIONAL: Select any other options or set the scale size.

Page 119: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 101

• Click OK.

Export to CAD/CAM file Dialog Box:

File name

Type a name for the file to export.

Browse

Click on the Browse button to display the Save In dialog box to change drivesand directories.

Contours

This feature is only available when exporting from SGS software. Choosebetween Sewing, Cutting, or Sewing and Cutting to define the boundary linesthat will be exported.

Formats:

This area is used to define the type of file to be created. Choose from:

Page 120: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel102

DXF is an AutoDesk/AutoCAD ASCII file format.

ANSI/AAMA American National Standard for Pattern Data Interchangeformats.

IGES is the Initial Graphics Exchange Specification file format of NBSIR.

CADL is a CADKEYO ASCIIfile format.

NST is the cncKad ASCII file format.

Scale Factor Unit

This is used to define the scale at which the file is to be exported. The defaultsetting is 1.0 to 1.0 or full scale.

Layers Table…

Select this button to view the Layers dialog box. This box is used to define thelayers for each element of the file to be exported.

Page 121: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 103

Layers Table Dialog Box:

Page 122: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel104

Dictionary Dialog Box:

Piece Name

Defines how the export files refers to the piece name.

Piece Code

Defines how the export files refers to the piece code.

Annotation

Defines how the export file refers to the annotation.

Size Name

Defines how the export files refers to the size name.

Page 123: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 105

Base Size Mark

Defines how the export files refers to the base size.

Material Code

Defines how the export file refers to a defined material group.

Quantity

Defines how the export file refers to the quantity.

Best Quality

Defines how the export files illustrates that the following defines the bestquality.

Orientation

Defines how the export file refers to the orientation.

Restore Defaults

Restores the default dictionary names for each item.

Page 124: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel106

Export to DXF and AAMA Setup:

Use DXF Blocks

When this box is enabled, DXF Blocks will be defined in the export file.

Create Point on Notch

This will add point to all the notches that will be import. The point will becreated on the notch base.

Page 125: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 107

Create Grading Rules For Notches

This option will enable you to create grading rules for all the notches in thefile that is being exported. It will only work, however, in the AAMA format.

Spline Step

This area is used to define the spline step amount when Don’t use Splines isdisabled.

Arc Bulge

This area is used to define the arc bulge amount when Don’t use Arcs isdisabled

Number of Arcs Sections

This area is used to define the arc sections when Don’t use Arcs is disabled.

Export Buttons Type

Set up how buttons will be export to the marker. If all the check boxes are clearthe buttons will export in the default mode as a circle.

Build Unique Pieces Names

If the Set box is checked, Optimark software will give unique names to all theexported pieces. The user can also set a maximum number of symbols for thenames of the pieces.

Page 126: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel108

Import from CAD/CAM Files

The Import CAD/CAM command is an optional piece of software that isactivated within SGS software packages when the Import Module ispurchased.

The Import Module converts any ASCII geometry file format from the list ofrecognized formats to the SGS file format. The new file is loaded directly ontothe screen. Files from any directory or disk may be chosen as long as it is aformat recognized by the Import module.

! Note: AutoCAD files can be imported into SGS software regardless ifpieces were originally drawn clockwise or counter clockwise

To Set Up the Import Options:

• From the File Menu choose Import CAD/CAM files. The ImportCAD/CAM files dialog box is displayed.

• Select the type of file to Import by checking the appropriate fileformat under the File Format field.

• Click Browse, and a second Import CAD/CAM File dialog box isdisplayed.

• Select the desired file(s) to import.

! Tip: To select multiple files, hold down the shift key and click on the desiredfiles.

• Click OK. The Import CAD/CAM Files dialog box is displayedagain.

• Select the desired Import options.

Page 127: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 109

• Click on Setup. The Import Setup dialog box will display.

• Select the options and enter the desired values.

• Click OK. The Import CAD/CAM Files dialog box will displayagain.

• Click OK. The selected files are imported with the desired valuesand options implemented.

Import CAD files Dialog Box:

Page 128: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel110

CAD Files to Import

This field will list the file to be imported. Click on the Browse button to selectthe file or files to be imported.

Working Units

Select the desired working units mm, cm, m, inches, feet, or yards. SGSsoftware uses the selected working units while converting files from oneformat to another. If the units are not correctly defined, the pieces are importedas the wrong size and the command will have to be repeated.

File Format

Choose the type of file to be imported. Following are the different importablefile formats:

DXF - AutoDesk/AutoCADTM ASCII file format.

AAMA - The American Apparel Manufacturing Association format is

based on the AutoCAD DXF file format. It was confirmed and agreed by alllarge CAD/CAM manufacturers.

IGES - Initial Graphics Exchange Specification file format of NBSIR.

CADL - CADKEYTM ASCII file format.

Gerber - Gerber Cutter & Cutting Edge file format.

DFT - cncKad ASCII file format.

HP/GL - General output file format that can be sent to most HPGL-compatible plotters. Approved by the American National Standard of theElectronic Industrial Association.

Page 129: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 111

MICROJET- File format used with the Microdynamics plotters.

Don’t Build Sizes

When this box is checked, all sizes of the same piece will appear as separatepieces on the Piece Bar. When Don’t Build Sizes box is unchecked, all sizes ofthe same piece will be organized in a Size List under Piece Bar. This is anautomatic procedure while importing files through AAMA format.

OptiMark - Import will try combine sizes of the pieces saved in a format otherthan AAMA (e.g. HP-GL), if the Piece Name and the Size information havebeen written into each relevant piece before being exported from another CADsolution. For example: Piece Name: Back, Size: M

! Note: The information to be entered into each piece for proper sizearrangement after Import needs to be in accordance with thedescriptions at the Import Dictionary.

Make DSN files

If this command is enabled, a Style (DSN) File is created when importing aMarker File.

Material

This field notes the Material Group in Info for the imported file(s).

Quantity

Defines the quantity in Piece Info. For the imported file(s). If an import filecontains several of the same pieces, SGS software reads only one and willinsert the right number of copies into the Piece Info. Box. If there aredifferences between the images, SGS software may not recognize that thepieces are multiples of the same pattern pieces.

Page 130: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel112

Ignore Internals

Defines the specific components to be imported from the import file.Eliminating specific components, like Notches, Texts, Lines, Arcs, or Circles,speeds the Import procedure. Selecting the Ignore Notch or Internals option(Lines, Arcs, Circles, or Text), does not mean that these elements are not read.In this case, these elements are read without being identified or sorted. Forexample, a V notch on the piece perimeter becomes part of the contour ratherthan being recognized as a having a V notch attribute.

OK

Click on the OK button after selected the file to Import. The file is imported.

Box

Click on this button to import a file within a closed contour box. This optionis used to bring in information if the file will not import properly. Use hisoption when an error dialog box appears such as “Entities Out of Contour” or“No Closed Contours Found”.

Setup

Click on the Setup button to display the Import Setup Dialog Box.

Page 131: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 113

Import Setup Dialog Box:

Tolerance

The Tolerance Value determines the farthest distance two points on a contourcan be placed apart and still be treated as the same perimeter (SGS softwareusually handles only properly closed contours. However, the tolerance valueensures that some contours that are not closed properly will be read).

Page 132: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel114

Bulge Chord Error

Bulge Chord Error is a parameter used to define the smoothness of Curves andArcs. A smaller value creates many additional points and segments within thepiece.

Min. Area:

Piece

If a piece boundary is smaller than the value defined in this box, the Importcommand disregards the piece and throws the piece away.

Hole

A hole is a closed contour on the same layer as the piece boundary. Use thisarea to define the minimum size of a hole. The minimum area of a hole shouldbe smaller than the smallest piece.

Default Internals Sizes

These fields define the default settings for internals when importing fromanother file format.

Button

This field is used to set the default size for the radius of a button.

Notch Depth

This field is used to set the default depth of a notch.

Notch Width

This field is used to set the default for the width of a notch.

Page 133: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 115

Text Size

This field is used to set the default for text size. If a text size was defined inthe Imported file, SGS software maintains that value. Text is informationtyped directly onto the piece. Piece Description text is defined using theDictionary dialog box.

V Notch’s Items – Max - Angle

This area is used to define the maximum angle of a V notch.

Near Angle

This area is used to define the smallest near angle of a V notch.

Min Circle Radius

This field defines the smallest size of an internal circle that will be imported.

Max Notch Ratio

The largest difference when dividing the width by the depth of the notch.

Max Notch Depth

The maximum depth for a notch.

Spline Angle

The smallest angle for curved lines.

Max Grade Angle

The maximum angle for a grading point.

Page 134: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel116

Import Setup Options

Ignore CR. / LF

Mainly for CNC files which come in one long line, or use a CR./LF after eachpoint. When enabled, the Carriage Return/Line Feed in the import file isignored.

Ignore Frame

SGS software ignores the outer frame (boundary), which is usually created forPlot files.

Separate Layers

SGS software remembers the layer of each element. If the new file is everexported, the elements keep their original layers. This option is used only for

Page 135: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 117

DXF files. Because SGS software recognizes elements and text on differentlayers, a circle inside a shape may make a noticeable difference in theimported file. If the circle is imported while the Separate Layers option isdisabled, the circle becomes a simple internal element. If the circle is to berecognized as a hole, it must be on the same layer as the outer perimeter line,or the DXF file can be imported with the Separate Layers option in the OFFposition

Join Pieces

This new command, enables you to Join Pieces manually and recognize themas the same piece. This function can be used after import of a DXF or anotherexternal CAD/CAM file. The recognition will accept a variation of about 2%in the area between the first piece and its copies.

- Mark the pieces in the ‘Piece List’ bar. Select the first piece.

- By the use of the ‘Shift’ key Mark the second and any other relatedpieces.

- Use the command ‘Join Pieces’ from the ‘Piece Info. Menu’.

- If the marked pieces really match each other with only minor change,they will appear as one piece, which is the first marked piece.

Auto Recognition of Internal Elements

Convert the longest line to baseline: this option will convert the longest line inthe piece to a baseline. This option is not available for the AAA format. CheckOn-Contour V-notches in AAMA files: this option will double check all the Vnotches that are located on the piece contour in the AAMA format

Page 136: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel118

Stripe Adjust

This command acts as an on/off toggle switch when working with Stripe,Plaid, and floral material. When activated, all same-type pieces will beadjusted to match the relative stripe coordinates of the first piece placed on themarker. The matching point for the pieces are determined using notches orbuttons with stripe adjust numbers from 1 to 4 or by using the Stripe AdjustGroup (see Marker menu, Stripe Definition and Relate Pieces to Stripescommands and Group menu, Stripe Adjust Group).

Auto Recognition Pieces Descriptions from Internal Text

This option allows you to choose one of the 4 display types:

Disable: this will disable the software from recognizing piece descriptions

• Piece Name: this will only recognize the name of the piece

• Piece Name and Code: this will recognize the name of the piece aswell it's code

• Piece Name, Code and Description: this will recognize the name ofthe piece, it's code as well as it's description from internal text.

Auto Recognition Size Names from Internal Text

This option will allow the software to automatically recognize size namesfrom the internal text of the pieces. You have 2 options:

Yes: this box will enable this option

Numerical Only: this box will recognize only numerical values as valid sizenames

Max. Number of Symbols setting allows you to delimit the size name

Page 137: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 119

Layers Table Dialog Box:

This dialog box is only available when importing AAMA files.

Format

The import format that was defined in the Import to CAD file Dialog Box.Only AAMA files support Layers.

Boundary Lines

The layer name/number to place piece boundary lines on.

Turn (Grade) Points

The layer name/number on which to place turn (grade) points.

Page 138: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel120

Curve Points

The layer name/number on which to place curve points.

Notches

The layer name/number on which to place notches.

Grain (Base) Lines

The layer name/number on which to place the grain (base) line.

Internal Lines (draw)

The layer name/number on which to place internal lines. If internal lines areused and they are to be cut with an Automatic cutter, they should appear on thesame layer as the outer perimeter. Otherwise, they will become internalelements with Draw attributes.

Internal Cut

The layer name/number on which to place internal cuts. If internal lines areused and they are to be cut with an Automatic cutter, they should appear on thesame layer as the outer perimeter. Otherwise, they will become internalelements with Draw attributes.

Drill Holes

The layer name/number on which to place drill holes.

Sew Lines

The layer name/number on which to place sew lines.

Page 139: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 121

Quality Lines

The layer name/number on which to place quality lines.

Restore Defaults

This button is used to restore the default layers for each item.

Dictionary Dialog Box:

The Dictionary dialog box enables SGS software to add attributes and data

to each imported piece and save this data with the Piece Info. SGS softwarelooks for the defined string and then uses the defined value or text thatexpresses the string parameter.

Page 140: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel122

Style Name

Defines how the import program searches for the style name.

Piece Name

Defines how the import program searches for the piece name. If a piece namestring is not defined, the longest line of text in the import file becomes thePiece Name.

Piece Code

Defines how the import program searches for the piece code.

Annotation

Defines how the import program searches for annotation.

Size Name

Defines how the import program searches for the size name.

Base Size Mark

Defines how the import program searches for the base size.

Material Code

Defines how the import program searches for the fined material group.

Quantity

Defines how the import program searches for the defined quantity.

Page 141: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 123

Best Quality

Defines how the import program searches for the defined best quality.

Orientation

Defines how the import program searches for the defined orientation.

Restore Defaults

This button is used to restore the default dictionary names for each item.

Plot

About Plotting

Use the Plot command to Plot or Cut the displayed pieces. Files can be plottedat a plotting device connected directly to one of the serial ports on yourmachine, or plots can be plotted to a plotting device connected to a network.

The new Output Control Center (OCC) is a utility that manages plot files aswell as queues on local and networks computers.

Use the print manager of your choice. The OutMan (Output Manager) is aWindows utility supplied by SGS software, which manages files. Files can besent to up to eight different serial printers or plotters. The QMan works in co-ordination with the OutMan and acts as a spooler for the different plot files.

The OutMan also works in a network situation. From different workstations,network files can be sent to different devices and OutMan plots them withoutinterfering with the regular workflow of SGS Applications.

If the OutMan is selected, enable the use of OutMan’s application in the Plotdialog box. Also, refer to the Configuring SGS Software to Your Plottersection in the Installation and setup chapter of the manual.

Page 142: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel124

There is a difference between the Plot and Print commands. Plot is used whenusing the OutMan print spooler to support your large pen plotters (Gerbers andIolines) and InkJet/Dot Matrix plotters (HP600, EnCad, AlgoTex, and theCalComp InkJet). A4/Letter paper size is referred to as small, and all papersizes larger than this are referred to as large.

Print is used when using the Windows print spooler and windows to supportyour small InkJet/Laser/Dot Matrix printer (such as HP, Canon etc.).

! Note: If you use only one plotter, you will not have to select and configure aplotter each time. The configuration will be saved in theOUTMAN.INI. If you have more than 1 plotter, once they areconfigured you will only have to specify the PLTR#.

Plotter Installation

Make sure that your plotter is installed and turned on.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must a piece in the working area.

Plotter (Output Manager) Setup

In order to use the plot command to send a job to an existing plotter, SGSsoftware must be configured properly. The Plotter Setup command defines thecommunication parameters for the plotters in use. Up to 8 different plotterscan be defined in a network.

! Note: Select between the OutMan and the OCC as the output manager inthe Plot dialog box. The "Use Output Manger" must be checked.

! Note: The communication parameters in the computer output port shouldhave been previously set to match the same parameters in the outputdevice. A print manager for a Local or Network Plotter should havealso been installed. For more information, refer to the ConfiguringSGS software To Your Plotter section in the end of this book.

Page 143: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 125

Setting the OutMan as Output Manager

• From the Plot dialog box select the OutMan as output manager.

• From the File Menu choose Plotter (Output Manager) Setup. ThePlotter Setup Dialog box is displayed

• Enable the Output Manager by clicking the box. A small V is placedin the box.

• Next, specify where the settings you select are to be saved; to dothis you will need to locate your Output Manager INI file. ClickBrowse to view your directories. The Output Manager INI Filedialog box will be displayed.

• Select the OptiTex directory. (The file Outman.ini automaticallydisplays in the File Name field.)

• Click OK. The Plotter Setup dialog box is displayed with theselected Outman.ini path shown

! Note: The SGS PDS, Grading, and Marking software all use the sameOutMan and Plotter Setup dialog boxes. Some options only apply toPDS and are not accessible in the Marking software, and vise-versa.

• Select the plotter by clicking the drop down arrow to the right of thecurrent plotter and select the appropriate PLTR#.

! Note: The number of plotters in the list depends on how many plotters werespecified during the Marking program Installation procedure.

• Click OK.

Page 144: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel126

To Output Using the OutMan Print Manager:

• From the File menu choose Open. The Open dialog box willdisplay.

• Select the desired Design file.

! Tip: To open a file quickly, double click the file name.

• Click OK to open the file. Select a piece.

• From the File menu select Plot. The Plot dialog box is displayed.Verify that the correct file is displayed in the file name box. If not,click Browse and select the correct file.

• Select the desired options.

! Tip: Verify that the correct Set up, paper size and plotter width, have beenselected prior to clicking OK.

• Click OK to save changes and exits the Plot Setting Dialog Box.The pieces will be plotted or cut.

! Tip: Once a file has been sent to the OutMan, you can continue to work atyour computer.

SGS software uses the WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get) systemwhile printing and plotting. This means that what you see (on the screen) is

what you get from the output device.

Page 145: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 127

Setting the Output Control Center (OCC) as your plotting spooler

The Output Control Center (OCC) is a 32 bit spooler that supports both serialand parallel communication.

To prepare a queue for the OCC spooler, use “Plotter Setup” wizard dialogbox:

In order to run “Plotter Setup” wizard dialog box follow the next steps:

• Select “Use Output Manager” option from Plot dialog box.

! Note: if “Use Output Manager” is disabled you need to set outman.ini filefrom “Plotter Select /outman Setup” dialog box.

• Now select “OCC” from “Output Manager Service” section on plotdialog box.

Page 146: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel128

! Note: if OCC queue is empty a message box that “There is no defaultqueue…” will be opened, use “OK” button to open “Plotter Setup”wizard dialog box. If you choose “Cancel” button a message box that“Failed to create a default queue…” will be opened.

• Use “Setup” button in “Output Manager Service” section to load“Plotter Setup” wizard dialog box.

Creating a new queue with “Plotter Setup” wizard dialog box:

• Click on the Add button to add a new plotter queue.

• Select "My Computer" if your computer is a local computer(computer that is connected to the printer/plotter). If your computeris a remote computer, select "Network Computer".

• In case of a local computer queue “Communication setting” pagewill be open:

Communication Protocol – OCC spooler supports four different protocoltypes:

Standard Protocol - Use this protocol to drive serial plotters with RS 232communication interface.

Page 147: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 129

Gerber Protocol – Use this protocol to drive Gerber ACCUPLOT machines:300, 310, 320 and 750.

Lectra Protocol – Use this protocol to drive Lectra E-32 and E-33 machine(Lectra “Flypen” machine uses different protocol).

OptiJet Protocol – Use this protocol to drive OptiJet printer.

Communication Attribute and Communication Parameters – If you are drivinga serial machine select correct communication parameters: Port, Baud Rate,Parity, Data Bits, Stop Bits, CTS/RTS, XON/XOFF, DTR Signal and RTAsignal. If you are driving a parallel machine, select only the correct LPT port.

In case of a remote computer queue, “Net Work Plotter” page will beopened.

Page 148: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel130

You can type the name of the remote Computer (the computer that isconnected to the machine) and click Connect, or double click on EntireNetwork tree to browse and find your computer.

Once you find your computer, click on the”+” sign to see the plotters sharedon this computer. Select the desired plotter, then Finish.

• Last page “Local Plotter Setting” – The “Local Plotter Setting” pageis only for a local computer queue:

• Plotter Name – Give your new queue a name (this queue name willbe displayed on OptiTex plot dialog and in the OCC tree queues).

• Plotter’s Queue Folder – This is OCC queue folder path, you will beable to find your new queue under the queue folder. This is highlyrecommended not to change the queue folder path!

! Note: Each queue folder contains two different file types:

*.job – this file is an OCC property file which holds all job attribute like: Jobstatus, etc.

*.out – this file contain the plotting data (HG-GL, DM-PL, AP-GL etc).

Page 149: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 131

Shared Plotter – Use this option to share you queue directory.

! Note: In case that your operating system is Windows 95, 98 or millennium,you need to share the queue directory and OCC directory manually!!

Use Finish button to make a new plotting queue.

• After creating a new plotting queue the “Plotter Setup” dialog boxwill show the new queue in the queue list.

• Select the new queue from the queues list and set this new queue asa default queue by using “Set Default” button or double click.

• Now use “Close” button to close “Plotter Setup” dialog box.

Page 150: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel132

! Note: After you close “Plotter Setup” dialog box, plotter/cutter setup dialogbox will show, choose the correct parameters for you machine andconfirm your selection with “OK”. where the plotter is connected.

Plotter connected to network computer

You can type the name of the remote Computer (computer with the plotter)and click Connect, or double click on Entire Network to browse and find yourcomputer. Once you find your computer, click on the + sign to see the plottersshared on this computer.

Select the desired plotter, then Finish.

You can now ready to plot to a remote plotter across your network.

Adding Plotter on Local Computer

Select the Port (COME, LP, etc) your plotter is connected to, then Next.

give the plotter queue a name For each plotter a Queue is created to hold,process and store files for your plotter. The default location will be displayedin the Plotters Queue Folder. To change the Queue location, click on theBrowse button then select the desired location for the Queue.

Page 151: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 133

Check the Shared Plotter box to make this plotter is available to othercomputers.

Once you have the desired settings, click Finish to add the selected device.

Plot Dialog Box:

Page 152: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel134

File Name

The File Name field contains the destination and name of the plot or cut filethat you are creating. To select a different file name or directory click onBrowse.

Use Output Manager

This option must be enabled to use the OutMan or the OCC. The outputmangers allow automatic plotter, if the OutMan or the OCC are not enabled,the plot file is created and stored in the displayed directory. Then, the plot filehas to be copied to the appropriate port.

Network Plotting

Enable this command when plotting through the network.

Output Manager Service

Choose between the OCC (Output Control Center) or the OutMan.

Alert on Start

When this option is enabled, a message will alert the user that the job is aboutto start plotting. This message is displayed on the screen of the computerattached to the plotter. Click OK to proceed.

Alert on End

When this option is enabled, a message will alert the user that the job hasfinished plotting. This message is displayed on the screen of the computerattached to the plotter. Click OK to proceed.

Page 153: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 135

Remove on End

When this option is enabled, the plot file is deleted after it is plotted.

Copies

This option allows specification of he number of copies to be plotted.

Plot to Ftp

This option enables you to upload the plot file to ftp server.

How To Use The FTP Plot Utility Feature:

There are three basic things that OptiTex user should have in Order to use thenew FTP plot utility feature:

• IP address (Internet protocol) of the destination computer.

• Password in case that the destination computer is passwordprotected.

• User Name in case other users share the destination computer.

Now, you can contact your computer using standard network cable to thedestination computer network.

After you connect to your network follow the following steps:

• Go to “Plot Dialog” box.

• Use “Setup” button in “FTP Plot” section in order to open ftp dialogbox:

• Insert the destination Computer IP addresses to “Address” windows

Page 154: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel136

and if there is a need, insert User name and Password.

• Now press on “Browse” button to access your destination computernetwork (the access process can take some time).

• From the “Select Working directory” windows select the workingdirectory which will be a target directory for the plot will.? On the“Path” windows the selected directory path will be displayed (youcan’t edit the path on the “Path” windows).

• Confirm your selection with Ok button.

• On the Plot dialog check “Use FTP plot” option.

• Send the plot file to this destination using “Ok” on plot dialog box.

Log File Reports – Use

This option writes plot information to a log file that contains information aboutthe marker, number of pieces placed and material usage. The log file can thenbe used for tracking plotted files. To view the log file, use a text editor orselect Solutions Reports from the Nesting Menu.

Change Log

Click on Change Log to change the text file to which the plot information iswritten.

Note (Custom Header)

This option allows the user to type in notes or instructions and plots them atthe end of the marker in the header. Note that if Marker Header is disabled,the notes do not plot.

Page 155: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 137

Plotter/Cutter Setting

This option displays the plotter type in use and how it is configured. It alsodisplays the plotter page size. Plotters and plotter settings can be changed inthe Plotter Setting dialog box. To open the Plotter Settings dialog box click onSetup.

Plot Setting Dialog Box:

The Plot Setting dialog box can be accessed through the Plot dialog box.

Page 156: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel138

Device Name

Name is the assigned name of the plotter. Up to 8 plotters can be defined.They are listed as PLTR1, PLTR2, etc. The name can be changed in the PlotterSetup command.

Driver Format

This option displays the Language the plotter is using. Consult yourplotter/cutter manual for language information or call the Fax Back Service (1-800-766-6644) for specific information related to your plotter or cutter. PlotterSize. Each output device, whether it is a plotter or a cutter, is treated as aplotter. Each kind of an X Y machine has its own type of command file orlanguage. The following plotter types are supported:

DMPL (*.DMP)

HPGL (*.HPG)

HPGL PlotTec (*.HPT)

HPGL Generic (*.HPG)

HPGL/2 (*.HP2)

Design Partner (*.DP)

IOLS (*.IOL)

EIA (*.EIA)

Cybrid Plotter

Cybrid Cutter/Plotter

Page 157: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 139

Mutoh Plotter

APGL Gerber Plotter (*.GGT)

AP700 Plotter

Gerber Cutter (*.GBR)

Eastman Cutter (*CMD)

Cutting Edge Cutter (*NC)

Wild Plotter/Cutter

Wild Plotter (*.WIL)

Microjet (*STD)

External Format

Device Options

Page in Center

This option keeps jobs aligned when using more than one page. Most plottershave their 0/0 point located at the Bottom Left point of the paper, althoughsome may have their 0/0 point set at the center of the page. If using a plotterthat has a 0/0 point at the center, enable this option. This orientation setting isused primarily for flat bed plotters.

Manual Frame Advance

This option is used primarily on flat bed plotters and plotters that do not feedpaper automatically. The plot stops at the end of each page to allow for paper

Page 158: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel140

replacement. If this option is enabled, the Enter key must be pressed after eachpage.

Use CR/LF in Code

Certain Gerber Cut Formats only use this option. Some Gerber cutters requirea new line after each command and some do not. The best way to check ifyour cutter needs to have a new line is to look at one of its example files. If thefile is one long paragraph, this command is not necessary. If the file starts eachcommand on a new line, this option must be enabled.

Use Initialization in File Header [<M70>/<IN>/…]

Some Gerber Cut Formats use this option. When enabled, it instructs the cutterto stop and wait for the user permission to continue/start the job. Not allGerber plotters support this command. Consult the Gerber User’s Manual forinformation on plotter/cutter support.

Use Bite Offset

This option is only supported by the Gerber Cut format. When enabled, itinstructs the plotter to put a small alignment mark on the fabric at the end ofeach frame. The small mark is placed outside the Marker area so as notinterfere with the actual marker.

Plotter Page Size

Determines the working area of the plotter. The program will “remember” thelast setting even if it was for a different plotter. X is the length of the frame orthe endless length of the paper roll. Y is the width of the paper. Forinformation on a specific plotter or cutter, call the Fax Back service (1-800-766-6644) for instructions related to the plotter or cutter of your choice.

Page 159: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 141

Gap after Plotting

This is the space the plotter puts at the end of the plot job. The default is 0.

Minimal Plot/Cut line

This option is only used for some Gerber plotters. It specifies the minimumdistance at which a line is still being cut. It saves plotting/cutting time to notcut two points that are too close to one another.

Min. Plot Spline Segment

Minimum Plot Spline Segment is similar to the Bulge Corde Error. It convertsany arc segment under a certain size to a simple straight line in order to savetime.

File Header

by using the this command you can add and customize header to the file . typein the desire command for piloting to Gerber plotter which do no support the<m70> command.

File Footer

by using the this command you can add and customize footer to the file . typein the desire command for piloting to Gerber plotter which support a filefooter.

Page 160: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel142

Font Options:

Use Plotter’s Built in Fonts

When this option is enabled, the plotter substitutes the fonts used on thecomputer with its own built in fonts. Not all plotters have built in fonts.Consult the plotter’s manual for font information. Using the plotters built infont speeds up plotting.

Plotter Font File

Click Browse to select a font file. The Open Font File dialog box displaysallowing a font to be selected from a specific drive or directory. If UsePlotters Built in Fonts is disabled, you must use the .FNT file.

Default Font Size (Inches)

This is the font size, which the plotter automatically uses if no other size isspecified. The default is .315.

Tools Setup Tab

The new tools setup feature enables OptiTex users to plot different line typeaccording to tool number or tool type.

There are several different plotter formats to support different lines type:

HG-PL, DM-PL, HG-PL/2, Wild Plotter, AP 700 Plotter, Muto Plotter etc'

! Tip: You can use OptiTex new feature to select a tool name, just click withmouse right button on "Tool Number/Layer Name" section and adialog box will be open:

Page 161: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 143

How to work with "Tool Setup" tab on "Plot Setup" dialog box:

The new tools setup feature enables OptiTex users to plot different line typesaccording to tool numbers or tool types.

There are several different plotter formats, which are support different linestype:

HG-PL, DM-PL, HG-PL/2, Wild Plotter, AP 700 Plotter, Muto Plotter, etc.'

Page 162: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel144

How to define a special tool for a selected element:

• To define a special tool number for a selected piece use "Tool Number/LayerName" section on "Piece Info" dialog or "Cut Order" dialog on Piece menu.

• To define a special tool number for an internal element use "ToolNumber/Layer Name" section on internal element attribute dialog box.. Selectthe desired internal element and use the double click function to open theattribute dialog box (you select the internal and then open the internal attributedialog box from "Edit" menu). You can also add a special tool number forinternal on "Cut Order" dialog box.

! Tip: You can use the new OptiTex feature to select a tool name:, just clickwith right mouse button on "Tool Number/Layer Name" section and adialog box will open:

Insert the tool number in the "Head Number" column on the correspondingrows according the desired tool or command type. Remember you can onlyuse numeric names in the "Head Number" column!

Select the desired line type from the list. Don't forget to fill in the tool numberinto the "Number of Heads" windows

Page 163: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 145

Number of Heads

This option is used with multi-pen plotters or plotters that have one pen andone knife.

Default Pens

Default Pens commands allow to select a specific tool for a specific command(cut, draw and cut internals). Default Pens commands are enabled in severalformats like, HP-GL, DM-PL, HP-GL/2 etc.

For example:

Your output device working with HP-GL formats and has three tools:

The Tools setting are:

Number of Heads = 3.

Draw = 2.

Cut Contour = 1.

Cut Internals = 3.

Explanation:

Tool number one will be using for an element that has attribute cut.

Page 164: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel146

Tool number two will be using for an element that has attribute draw.

Tool number three will be using for an element that has attribute cut internals.

Plot Options

Plot Continuous

Select this option to plot continuously. Plotters with roll paper generally plotcontinuously. Plotters with manual page feed do not plot continuously.

! Note: If the actual marker is wider than the plotter, the selected option isScale equal to 1 X 1 and Continuous Plot is enabled, then specialmarks are plotted to join two or more sections of the plot.

Marker Header

When this option is enabled, general maker information such as size, plies, andnumber of pieces placed, notes, etc. is plotted at the end of the marker.

Marker Boundary

When this option is enabled, the marker boundary or frame is plotted aroundthe marker edge.

Scale Factor

This option specifies the scale in which the image is to plot. The default scaleis 1 to 1.

One Frame

This option scales the selection to fit on one plotter page and works inconjunction with Plot Continuous.

Page 165: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 147

Frame Advance After Last Frame

This option when using a pen plotter that plots in defined frames. (Forexample, the Ioline 600 plots in 46” frames) It is necessary to check thisoption so that the plotter will advance after plotting the first frame.

Whole Pieces in Frame Only

This option is using with flat bead plotters/cutters. When this option isenabled any piece that is not within the frame in whole will not be plotted orcut.

Order by Tools

This option is used when more than one pen or knife is used to cut or draw themarker. When enabled, all sections assigned to one tool can be sent at thesame time: all the notches are cut or plotted first, then drills, then punches, andthen the cut sequence. This allows for a changing of tools between sections.

Pens (Tools) According to Sizes

When using a multiple pen plotter, it is possible to assign each size a differentpen. Select this option to enable plotting with pens according to size.

Check Intersections before Plotting

The marker is plotted exactly as it appears on the screen (WYSIWYG).When this option is enabled, the software checks the marker for overlappingpieces and displays a warning message if any found. The overlapping pieceswill be plotted as they are, if this option is not checked.

Page 166: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel148

Optimize Plot/Cut Order

This command is used to define a portion of the marker to be optimized forplotting or cutting. If selected, an additional dialog box will be opened wherethe optimization limits can be defined.

Bulge (Corde Error) Inches

The Bulge Corde Error setting is the smallest size at which an arc can appearand still be plotted as an arc. When plotting arcs with very small bulge chords(practically straight lines) it is faster to plot them as straight lines. This savesplotting time. If the Bulge Corde Error is set to 0, the curve is plotted, nomatter how slight.

Plotter Setup

! Note: the plotter setup dialog box is different between the OutMan and theOCC.

Plotter Setup Dialog (OutMan manager)

Use Output Manager

Select this option to use the Output Manager provided by SGS. When thisoption is disabled, the plot file is created but is not sent to the output device.

Page 167: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 149

Output Manager INI File:

The default INI file is C:\OPTITEX\OUTMAN.INI. If a different INI file isdesired, select Browse to display the Output Manager INI-File dialog box andselect the appropriate file.

Current Plotter

Select the plotter to be used in the Current Plotter drop down box. Up to 8different plotters can be configured in a server setting.

Plotter Setup Dialog (OCC)

• Select the plotter to be used in the plot command.

• The plotter can be set as default by clicking the SET DEFAULTbutton

Page 168: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel150

• Click "Close"

Print

Use the Print command to output pieces to a printer. The Printer drivers arepart of Microsoft Windows, so SGS software displays the printer driver(s) thatwas (were) selected when Microsoft Windows was installed.

The Print command uses Windows printer drivers and spoolers; therefore, theoutput device must be installed through the Windows Setup before printingtakes place.

Print is used when using the Windows print spooler to support smallInkJet/Laser/Dot Matrix printer (such as HP, Canon etc.). A4/Letter paper sizeis referred to as small, and all paper sizes larger than this are referred to aslarge. Text sent to printer can be different from the text seen on screen. Usethe Fonts Command in the Options Menu to change the font type and size

To Print a File:

• From the File Menu select Print or click the Print icon on the toolbar. The Print dialog box is displayed.

• Select the desired printing options.

• Click OK.

Page 169: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 151

Print Dialog Box:

Choose what to print:

Marker, Pieces and Report

Format Options

Single page

Use this option to print your marker on a single printer page.

Multiple pages

Use this option to print your marker on multiple pages.

Page 170: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel152

Fixed Scale

Use this option to print a real scale of your marker.

Options

Only current Piece

Use this option to print only the selected piece.

Marker Header

Use this option to print your marker header (In OptiTex marker is all theinformation that displayed on marker status bar).

Marker Boundary

Use this option to print a frame around the printed marker.

Print X-direction

This option is available only when “Fixed Scale” option is selected. Use PrintX- direction option to divide the printed frames on the X- direction (length),the default is Y- direction (width).

Print Continuous

This option is available only when “Fixed Scale” option is selected. Use PrintContinuous option to send all the printed pages continuously.

Check Intersection

Use this option to check for intersections on your marker before sending themarker to printing.

Page 171: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 153

Report to File

Use this option to send your marker file into a text report. The Report to Fileoption in available only one the Report check box is checked.

! Note: When you send you report into a file, Report to Excel dialog will beopen.

Weight per sq

Use this option (only when the report check box is checked) to calculate thefabric weight on your current marker. Remember to insert your fabric weightser sq - working units (if your square working units are inches it will besq.inches) into the Weight per sq windows.

! Note:Use this field to add any text information into your printed markerheader.

Report to Excel and E-Mail utilities

Generates a report in Excel’s native format from OptiTex PDS and

E-Mails the report and the file directly from OptiTex PDS.

The style file can be converted to excel file and can be mailed and reported byusing this dialog box.

Page 172: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel154

Report Contains

Marker Drawing

Use this option to draw your marker into your Excel report.

Pieces / Order Information

Use this option to add information on your marker order into your Excelreport.

Internal Information

Use this option to add your Excel report information abut the size, quantity ofthe internals elements (buttons, notches etc) in your marker.

Page 173: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 155

Detailed Piece Information

Use this information to add your Excel report information on pieces: piecesperimeter, pieces area etc.

Excel File

By clicking on the “…“ button you can browse the files on yours hard driveand define the name of the excel file to be created.

You can set excel file visible and the after saving the file it will be openedautomatically.

Other option is to appended report to existing file and then the report will beadded at the end of the Excel file that has been chosen at the upper field.

MetaFile

To create a MetaFile you must check the box.

The scale X and scale Y fields gave the option to increases or decrees the sizeof the MetaFile.

"…" – by clicking this button you can browse your drive to locate the placethat the file will be saved

Mail

OptiTex can mail the style files to any mail recipient. You can attendee to themassage 3 different files.

DSN file – mail the style file as he saved by optitex.

Excel report – mail the excel file.

Page 174: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel156

MetaFile – mail a picture witch can insert to any office document or can beopened with acrobat reader.

To Mail a File:

• The E-MAIL dialog box appears.

• Enter the e-mail address that you want to sand the massage to.

• You have the option to attach more files and to add the massagename and subject.

• Click O.K.

The massage with the attached files will be sand to the desire address

Page 175: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 3: File Menu 157

Send To

Enter the mail recipient e-mail address. E-mail massages can be mail tounlimited number of recipients.

Attachment

To add files to the e-mail massage check the “Add current file” box and the“Add Files” button to locate the files to sand.

Exit (Alt+F4)

Select the Exit command to close the Style File and exit the program.

To Exit the Program:

From the File menu chooses Exit or press ALT+F4.

Page 176: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manuel158

Page 177: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 4: Piece Menu 159

Chapter 4: Piece Menu

Piece information and attributes can be changed in the Piece Menu by usingInfo, Piece Info, or Global Info dialog boxes. The changes made in thesedialog boxes will only be applied to the open marker file. For permanentchanges to piece information and attributes, it is best to make changes usingGlobal Info or Info in the Optitex PDS program.

! Note: A marker can hold up to 800 pieces with an unlimited number ofplies. There can be up to 900 pieces, including all sizes, in the PieceDisplay Bar. Each pattern contour can have up to 1000 segments.Each piece can have no more than 100 internal elements. If thesequantities are insufficient, please contact your local dealer.

Info (Ctrl+I)

This command is used to verify, update and change all text and parameters ofthe selected piece and size. The Piece Information includes the style and piecename, code, description, number of copies and current plies, remainders,buffering information, area and perimeter measurements, priority in autonesting, orientation of the piece, rotation limits, locked piece and flippinginformation.

Page 178: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual160

Piece Information dialog:

To Use Piece Info:

• From the Piece Menu, select Info or press CTRL + I. The PieceInformation dialog box will be displayed with the current settingsfor the highlighted pattern piece.

• Select the desired options.

• Click Apply.

Page 179: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 4: Piece Menu 161

While the Piece Info Dialog Box is displayed, the next piece or size can beedited by clicking on the desired piece or size in the Piece Display Bar. Theattributes for the highlighted piece will be displayed in the Piece Informationdialog box.

Piece Name

The piece name field is used to define the name of the piece.

Code

The code field is used to assign the pattern piece a code number.

Description

The description field is used to describe the selected piece. The descriptionwill be printed in the Piece Info report.

Block Size

The X and Y distance of a piece that has been Block Fused.

Quantity

The total number of copies to be nested on the marker. The number willappear as a counter in the size list. As nesting proceeds, the quantity in the sizelist will decrease until all pieces have been nested or the marker is full.

Plies

The number of current plies used on the marker. Using the optimumcalculations in the marker menu can change the number of plies.

Page 180: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual162

Remainders

The number of extra pieces calculated for the current marker.

Buffer Size

A buffer area is applied around the full perimeter of all the pieces in theselected size. The working units used are the same as those used for markerdimensions.

! Note: If a buffer value has been specified, the contour of the piece willappear increased on the marker unless Buffered Contour is uncheckedin the Pieces on Marker dialog box under the Display Menu.

! Tip: Select Up, Down, Right, or Left to add a Buffer to a specific side of thepiece.

! Note: Check which working units are being used before changing thebuffering of a piece. Be careful not to mix your working units (thereare two working units fields Liner and Area).

Area

The surface area covered by the piece. The units of measurement are the sameas those used for marker dimensions. If the marker is 54 x 54 inches, the areais displayed in inches. The area is net value. If a buffer was declared, it willalso be included in the area value.

Perimeter

The boundary distance around the piece. The units of measurement are thesame as those used for marker dimensions.

Page 181: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 4: Piece Menu 163

Orientation

This area is used to define if the piece is a right, left, or unknown. If there are2 copies requested and Both is checked, one right and one left piece will beplaced on the marker. If there are 2 copies requested and Both is unchecked,two identical pieces will be placed on the marker. If Left or Right is definedan L and/or an R will be displayed on the nested piece in the piece description.

Folding Allowed

When placing a tubular marker, some pieces can be folded along the topand/or bottom edge of the marker edge. Use the Fold Up/Down option tospecify which pieces can be folded. When placing a perfectly spread face toface marker, some pieces can be folded along the left and right edge of themarker edge. Use the Fold Left/Right option to specify which pieces can befolded.

Directions

When nesting pieces, OptiMark will attempt to rotate pieces to obtain the bestfit within the marker. Pattern Pieces many be assigned one-way rotation, two-way rotation, four-way rotation, or anyway rotation. With one-way rotation, apiece has no rotation. Two-way rotation allows the piece to rotate in 180-degree increments. Four-way rotation allows the piece to rotate in 90-degreeincrements. When an Anyway rotation is defined, the piece can rotate anyamount.

Flip Allowed

Flip Allowed option allows the pattern piece to be flipped in the up, down,left, and right direction.

Page 182: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual164

Max Tilt

Max Tilt defines the maximum amount that piece can be manually tilted in themarker. After defining the angle (usually no more than 5 deg.), use the F11and F12 keys to tilt a piece in the marker.

Locked Piece

If enabled, the pattern piece will not be placed when marker is auto-nested.

Material

The Material option defines the specific material group of which thehighlighted piece is included. If you would like the piece to be placed in adifferent material group, you can change it here for this one marker.

Print Report

This command will print a summary report of the information defined in thePiece Information dialog box. You can change the fonts using the Fonts optionin the Options Menu.

Best Quality

This option is used to define the quality of leather that this selected piece mustbe cut from.

The attributes for each piece are displayed on the Size List as symbols orletters. The symbols allow you to view the properties of each piece withouthaving to open the Piece Info dialog box.

Page 183: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 4: Piece Menu 165

<+> = 90° Rotation allowed (4 way)

<-> = 180° Rotation allowed (2 way)

< > = No rotation (1 way)

<^> = All Rotation allowed (anyway)

<=> = Orientation: Both

<U> = Up/Down Folding allowed

<S> = Left/Right Folding allowed

<L> = Locked piece for Automatic nesting

<B> = Buffer is declared

<R> = Remaining pieces after plies are calculated

<M> = Mirror allowed

Page 184: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual166

All Sizes Info

Attributes for all sizes of a selected piece can be set in this dialog box.

Page 185: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 4: Piece Menu 167

To Set All Sizes Info:

• From the Piece Menu choose All Sizes Info.

• Enter the desired values.

• Click Apply next to each changed value.

• Click Close.

The following attributes can be set in the All Size Info dialog box as well asattributes described in the Piece Information Dialog Box.

Adjust description

Control the maximum text size of the piece description on the pattern pieces.

Optimize Internal’s Sequence

When this button is clicked, the software assigns the best cutting order forinternal elements on the pattern pieces.

Quantity

Amount of the pattern pieces to be placed on the marker can be changed in thisfield.

Page 186: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual168

Global Info

The Global Info controls information settings for all sizes or specific sizes onall pieces or specific pieces in the marker.

Page 187: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 4: Piece Menu 169

To Set Global Info for all Sizes on All Pieces:

• From the Piece Menu choose Global Info. The Global Pieces Infodialog box is displayed.

• Enter the desired values.

• Click Apply after each changed value.

To Specify Settings for the Selected Size on Selected Pattern Pieces:

• Hold down the Shift key and select the pieces in the Piece DisplayBar.

• In the Global Info dialog box, check the Settings For SelectedPieces Only and/or the Settings for Selected Sizes Only options.

• Select the size for which you want to assign attributes.

• Enter the attributes for that size. Click Set after each change.

• Click Close to exits the Global Information dialog box.

The following attributes can be set in the Global Piece Info dialog box as wellas the attributes described in the All Size Information Dialog Box. Selectedpieces in the Piece Display Bar can be edited.

Settings for Selected Sizes Only

When this command is enabled, only the select sizes in the Piece Display Barcan be edited.

Page 188: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual170

Weight Per Sq. Yard

Weight of the fabric can be entered in this field. Click Re-Calculate button to

update the values in the information box listed above.

Internal Text

Defines the size of the minimum and maximum internal text on pieces.

Set to Default

When checked, the defaults will be reset to use adjusted descriptions andinternal text sizes.

Delete

This command deletes the piece or size selected in the Piece Display Bar. Allnested pieces will be removed from the marker.

! Tip: To select multiple pieces in the marker, hold down the shift key andselect the pieces you wish to edit in the Piece Display Bar

Delete a Piece:

• From the Piece Menu, select Delete.

Page 189: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 4: Piece Menu 171

• In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to delete all sizes of thepiece, click No to delete the selected size only.

The Piece will be removed from the Piece Display Bar and the marker.

Flip Vertical

The Flip Vertical command creates a mirror image of the selected piece. Themirrored piece is added to the Piece Display Bar with the same piece attributesas the original.

To Flip a pattern Vertically:

• Select the piece in the Piece Display Bar.

• From the Piece Menu choose Flip Vertical.

• In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to mirror all sizes of thepiece, click No to mirror the selected size only.

A mirror image of the selected piece will be added to the end of the PieceDisplay Bar. This option can be used to change the piece direction and tocreate a new piece with an opposite direction.

Page 190: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual172

Flip Horizontal

The Flip Horizontal command creates a mirror image of the selected piece.The mirrored piece is added to the Piece Display Bar with the same pieceattributes as the original.

To Flip a pattern Horizontally:

• Select the piece in the Piece Display Bar.

• From the Piece Menu choose Flip Horizontal.

• In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to mirror all sizes of thepiece, click No to mirror the selected size only.

A mirror image of the selected piece will be added to the end of the PieceDisplay Bar. This option can be used to change the piece direction and tocreate a new piece with an opposite direction.

Page 191: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 4: Piece Menu 173

Make Hole (Ctrl+H)

A hole is a shape within the marker that has smaller pieces inside of it. A holecan be used for block fusing for nesting leather.

The Make Hole function allows the user to place small pattern pieces on anodd shaped piece of fabric such as leather. The shape is placed in a box on themarker.

• Select the piece in the Piece Display Bar to make the hole.

• From the Piece Menu, select Make Hole or Ctrl+H.

• In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to Make Hole all sizesof the piece, click No to Make Hole the selected size only.

! Note: One pattern piece for each size is created with a locked attribute forauto nesting.

Page 192: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual174

Join Pieces

The Join Pieces function allows to similar pieces to be combined and betreated as the same pattern piece in the Piece Display Bar.

Select the first pattern piece to be joined. Use the ‘Ctrl’ key and select thesecond piece. From the Piece Menu, select Join Pieces.

! Note: If the joined pieces match each other with only minor change, thepieces will appear as the first selected piece.

Edit Piece

The Edit Piece command provides a special editing environment for lastminute changes to piece. These changes are only made to the selected pieceand over ride attributes defined in the Piece Info dialog box.

! Note: If you want all future markers to display these pattern changes, thepiece must be edited in OptiTex PDS.

Page 193: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 4: Piece Menu 175

To Edit a Selected Piece:

• Select the pattern piece in the Piece Display Bar.

• From the Piece Menu, choose Edit Piece. The Piece Pattern Editordialog box is displayed.

• Select the desired option(s).

• Click Apply and Close.

Piece Pattern Editor Dialog Box:

Page 194: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual176

Original

Selecting Original will return the piece to its original state before any changeswere made in the Piece Pattern Editor dialog box.

Flip

To use the Flip option, check the Horizontal or Vertical fields at the bottom ofthe dialog box and click Apply.

Add Point

The Add Point option adds a point to the piece buffer perimeter but does notadd a point to the original perimeter. Select the Add Point button, click wherethe point is to be added, and click Apply.

Mirror

The Mirror option adds a piece to your marker that has been symmetricduplicated. Select the Mirror button, click and drag on mirror line, and clickApply.

Rotate

The rotate command allows a piece to be rotated. This change is only made tothe selected piece and over rides attributes defined in the Piece Info dialogbox.

! Note: There are many ways to rotate pieces in OptiMark. The 90/180 icon,the Rotate icons, and rotating with the mouse follow the attributes thathave been defined in the Piece Info dialog box. The Edit Piece andRotate functions found in the Piece Menu allow the marker maker tocreate separate attributes for a pattern piece.

Page 195: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 4: Piece Menu 177

Delete Point

The Delete Point command is used to delete points added with the Add Pointcommand to the buffered perimeter of a piece. Select Delete Point, click thepoint to delete and click Apply.

Cut

This command is used to split/cut/divide a single pattern piece eitherhorizontally or vertically.

To Cut a Piece:

• From the Piece Pattern Editor dialog box, click the Cut button.

• Enter a seam allowance value.

• Select Horizontal or Vertical.

• Click your mouse along the bottom edge of the graph on the rightside of the dialog box for horizontal cutting, or along the left sidefor vertical.

! Note: Enable the Half option to split the piece in half. If you want to splitthe piece a specific amount, disable the half box.

• Drag the mouse to the desired location.

• Select Apply.

! Note: When cutting a piece into two parts, two new pieces are displayed inthe Piece Display Bar with the same quantity as the original piece.

Page 196: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual178

Buffer

Buffer can be applied to a specific area of a piece and added to all the pieces ina specified size. To add a buffer to only one piece in one size on the marker,create a new piece by copying the old one and buffer it.

• In the Piece Pattern Editor dialog box, select the Buffer option.

• Enter a buffer value in the field.

• Check Around, Up, Down, Special, Right or Left. When usingSpecial, click on a line between two points. The line willhighlight.

• Click Apply.

! Note: The buffer will be executed only if it is possible to create one.

Move Point

The Move Point command is used to move points on the buffered perimeter ofa piece. Select the Move Point button, click and drag point to the new locationand click Apply.

Rotate

This command rotates a piece in the Piece Dialog Box or a piece nested withinthe marker by a pre-determined angle. The base piece can not be rotated ifthere is already a piece placed on the marker.

! Note: There are many ways to rotate pieces in OptiMark. The 90/180 icon,the Rotate icons, and rotating with the mouse follow the attributes thathave been defined in the Piece Info dialog box. The Edit Piece andRotate functions found in the Piece Menu allow the marker maker tocreate separate attributes for a pattern piece.

Page 197: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 4: Piece Menu 179

To Rotate a Base Piece:

• Select the piece in the Piece Display Bar.

• From the Piece Menu, select Rotate. The Rotation by Angeldialog box is displayed.

• Select the desired option(s).

• Click Close.

To Rotate a Piece within the Marker:

• Select the piece in the Marker.

• From the Piece Menu, select Rotate. The Rotation by Angledialog box is displayed.

• Select the desired option(s).

• Click Close.

! Tip: Group the pieces before selecting Rotate to rotate several pieces atone time.

Page 198: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual180

Internals (Ctrl+E)

The Internals dialog box allows internal attributes in a pattern piece to bechanged for a selected piece and size. Attributes on each internal elementinclude size, direction, cut/plot order, etc. Call the Fax Back System to learnhow the options should be set for various NC Cutters.

Internals Dialog Box:

Page 199: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 4: Piece Menu 181

Internals

The type of internal being edited on the selected piece is highlighted. Internalsthat can be edited include buttons, lines, arcs, circles, contours, dart points, orpleats. Use the arrows in the dialog box to edit a different internal on the piece.

Notches

The type of notch you are currently editing is highlighted. Notches to editinclude T, I, L, V, U, or Box. Use the arrows in the dialog box to edit adifferent internal on the piece.

Length, Depth, Radius, Perimeter

A new length, depth, radius, or perimeter can be defined for a selectedinternal. Type the new value and click Apply.

Width, Arc’s Length

A new width or arc length can be defined for the selected internal. Type thenew value and click Apply.

Mode

The Mode option allows the user to define which tool the numericallycontrolled (NC) cutter will use to cut or draw the selected internal. The optionsinclude Draw, Cut, Drill M43, Aux Drill M44, Punch M68, Quality, Sew, andNone.

Stripe Adjust Number

A Stripe Adjust Number on selected notches and buttons can be assigned.Stripe Adjust Numbers are used for Stripe/Plaid markers. For moreinformation on the Stripe Adjust Numbers, refer to the Stripes and RelatePiece to Stripes commands in the Marker menu.

Page 200: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual182

Operation Stop

The Operation Stop command defines the Op Stop for the selected internal: NoStop, Before With Confirmation, or Stop.

Plotting / Cutting Time

The Plotting/ Cutting Time command defines the when the internals will becut on a pattern piece: Before the external contour, Together with the externalcontour, or After the external contour.

Sequencing the Internal’s Cutting Order:

Show Numbers

The order in which each internal is cut will be displayed when this option isenabled.

Set

This option changes the order in which the selected internal is cut.

Sort

The Sort function quickly reassigns the order in which each internal is cut.

Forward

The Forward function reassigns the cut order for each internal forward.

Arrows

The arrows move between internals that are being edited on a piece.

Page 201: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 4: Piece Menu 183

Inverse

The Inverse function reverses the direction in which the selected internal willbe cut or drawn.

Delete

This option deletes the selected internal.

Apply

The Apply button must be clicked for the pattern edit to take place on screen.

Close

To exit the Internals dialog box, click Close.

Page 202: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual184

Internal Text

Select the internal text command in order to edit text to piece

To add an internal text:

• Choose the internal command from the piece menu.

• Click add to add a text

• Enter you desire text in the Text Editor box.

• Select the font size and the angle.

• You can apply to all the size by checking the “apply to all thesize” box.

• To remove a text: click on the desire text and click remove.

Page 203: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 4: Piece Menu 185

• Click O.K.

Holes and Internal Contours

The Holes and Internal Contours command is used to define whether piecescan be nested within the internal cut outs of larger pieces, to change the cutorder of internal cutouts, or to change the cut direction of internal cutouts.

Holes and Contours Dialog Box:

Page 204: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual186

Under Current section

Change type

Use this option to change internals contour attribute from holes to contours orfrom contours to holes. OptiMark software “treat” different internals withhole attribute. If your internal contour attribute is hole, OptiMark automaticnesting will place pieces in the hole if they fit.

! Note: If the internal contour attribute is hole, in case of cutting the internalcontour, cutter entry point will be inside the hole. This way you canavoid the cutter knife to damage your fabric.

Delete

Use the Delete button to delete a selected contour.

Closed Contour

Use this option to close internal line to a close contour.

Page 205: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 4: Piece Menu 187

Now you can change to internal contour attribute to “hole”.

Page 206: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual188

Cut Order

Use this option to open “Cut Order Optimization” dialog box for editing yourinternal contour cut direction.

Current

Shows selected internal cutout. The Change button defines the selected cutoutas a Hole or a Contour. The Delete button deletes an internal cutout. TheInverse button changes the cutting direction of an internal cutout.

Area/Perimeter

The area and perimeter of the selected internal cutout is displayed.

Global Set

The minimum and maximum size of holes and contours is set in this area.

Page 207: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 4: Piece Menu 189

Sequence

The Arrows change the order in which internal cutouts will be cut. If checked,show Numbers displays the order in which internal cutouts will be cut

Hole Level

The Hole Level command is used in the leather industry. When cutting leatherthere are different zones, hole levels, with different qualities located one insideanother (pieces are nested on leather according to the area & quality). UseHole Level command when you have several holes located one inside another.The level sequence goes from the biggest hole (the external hole) being levelone to smallest hole. (The number of levels is according to the number ofholes located one inside another).

Global Change Internals Parameters

The Global Change Internals Parameters dialog box allows the attributes of theinternal elements to be changed to at one time. Changes in type, size, andwhether internals are cut or drawn can be made to a currently selected piece,all sizes of the current piece, or all pieces in the marker.

! Note: This command is very important after importing files that are createdfor specific cutting machines or for exporting to a machine notcommonly used.

Page 208: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual190

Global Change Internals Dialog Box:

Pieces

Select All to apply changes to all the pieces in the file. Select All sizes ofcurrent to apply changes to all the sizes of the current selected piece. SelectCurrent only to apply changes to the selected size of the piece.

Internal Types

The Type of Internals to edit includes notches, lines, arcs, buttons, circles, dartpoints, or contours.

Page 209: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 4: Piece Menu 191

Internal Sizes

Defines the size of the new internal element.

Current

The type of internal to be changed is selected on the left side of the dialog box.

New

The type of internal to replace selected internal is on the right side of thedialog box.

All

All selected internals on all pieces and all sizes will be edited when this ischecked.

Place Selected Pieces

Place (Ctrl+P):

Use this command to place a selected piece or pieces on the marker area.

• In the Piece Display Bar, select the pieces to place.

• In the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select Place orCTRL+P.

! Note: When you place the pieces with Place command, a pattern piece willbe placed on the marker even if the quantity in the Piece Display Baris 0. The software will not be able to place the pieces on the marker bydouble clicking the mouse if the quantity in the Piece Display Bar is 0.

Page 210: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual192

Place One Set (Ctrl+Shift+P)

Use this command to place one set or bundle of the selected piece or pieces onthe marker area.

• In the Piece Display Bar, select the pieces to place.

• In the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select Place OneSet or CTRL+SHIFT+P.

Place All (Ctrl+Shift+Alt+P)

Use this command to place all of the selected pieces on the marker area.

• In the Piece Display Bar, select the pieces to place.

• In the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select Place Allor CTRL+SHIFT+ALT+P

Place Folded Left

This command is used to fold a piece in half and then place it along the leftedge of the marker boundary. Place Folded Left can only be used on Faced orFolded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed on the right/left.

• In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece to fold along the leftboundary of the marker.

• From the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select PlaceFolded Left.

! Note: The piece can also be placed along the left boundary of the marker byplacing the cursor in the desired location on the left edge of themarker boundary, holding down the L key, and double clicking the leftmouse button.

Page 211: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 4: Piece Menu 193

Place Folded Right

This command is used to fold a piece in half and then place it along the rightedge of the marker boundary. Place Folded Right can only be used on Facedor Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed on the right/left.

• In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece to fold along the rightboundary of the marker.

• From the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select PlaceFolded Right.

! Note: The piece can also be placed along the right boundary of the markerby placing the cursor in the desired location on the left edge of themarker boundary, holding down the R key, and double clicking the leftmouse button.

! Note: Once the piece is placed, the bump tools can be used to move thepieces around on the marker boundary. To unfold a piece, simplyreturn the piece to the Piece Display Bar.

Place Folded Up

This command is used to fold a piece in half and then place it along the upperedge of the marker boundary. Place Folded Up can only be used on Tubular orFolded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed on the up/down.

• In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece to fold along the upperboundary of the marker.

• From the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select PlaceFolded Up.

! Note: The piece can also be placed along the upper edge of the marker byplacing the cursor in the desired location on the left edge of the

Page 212: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual194

marker boundary, holding down the U key, and double clicking theleft mouse button.

Place Folded Down

This command is used to fold a piece in half and then place it along the loweredge of the marker boundary. Place Folded Down can only be used onTubular or Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed on theup/down.

• In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece to fold along the lowerboundary of the marker.

• From the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select PlaceFolded Down.

! Note: The piece can also be placed along the lower edge of the marker byplacing the cursor in the desired location on the left edge of themarker boundary, holding down the D key, and double clicking theleft mouse button.

Place Folded Left-Up

This command is used to fold a piece into quarters and place it in the upper leftcorner of the marker boundary. Place Folded Left-Up can only be used onFolded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed on the up/downand left/right.

• In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece to fold into quarters andplace in the upper left corner of the marker boundary.

• From the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select PlaceFolded Left-Up.

Page 213: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 4: Piece Menu 195

! Note: The piece can also be placed along the upper left corner of themarker boundary by holding down the Home key (located on thenumeric keypad) and double clicking the left mouse button.

Place Folded Left-Down

This command is used to fold a piece into quarters and place it in the lower leftcorner of the marker boundary. Place Folded Left-Down can only be used onFolded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed on the up/downand left/right.

• In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece to fold into quarters andplace in the lower left corner of the marker boundary.

• From the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select PlaceFolded Left-Down.

! Note: The piece can also be placed along the lower left corner of the markerboundary by holding down the End key (located on the numerickeypad) and double clicking the left mouse button.

Place Folded Right-Up

This command is used to fold a piece in quarters and place it into the upperright corner of the marker boundary. Place Folded Right-Up can only be usedon Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed on the up/downand left/right.

• In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece to fold into quarters andplace in the upper right corner of the marker boundary.

• From the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select PlaceFolded Right-Up.

Page 214: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual196

! Note: The piece can also be placed along the upper right corner of themarker boundary by holding down the Page Up key (located on thenumeric keypad) and double clicking the left mouse button.

Place Folded Right-Down

This command is used to fold a piece in quarters and place it into the lowerright corner of the marker boundary. Place Folded Right-Down can only beused on Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed on theup/down and left/right.

• In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece to fold into quarters andplace in the lower right corner of the marker boundary.

• From the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select PlaceFolded Right-Down.

! Note: The piece can also be placed along the lower right corner of themarker boundary by holding down the Page Down key (located onthe numeric keypad) and double clicking the left mouse button.

Page 215: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 5: Marker Menu 197

Chapter 5: Marker Menu

The Marker Menu contains commands related to the marker and nestingfunctions. Use the Marker Menu to specify marker dimensions, clear a marker,place pieces on the marker, remove pieces from the marker, and detect whenpieces are overlapping. The usual workflow of preparing a marker is asfollows:

• Load a design (DSN) file by choosing the Open Design Filescommand from the File menu.

• Define the material type and order values for each size in theOrder for Marker Making dialog box.

• Define the number of Plies by using the Optimum Calculationscommand in the Marker menu.

• Define the marker width and length and spreading method byusing the Marker Definitions command in the Marker menu.

• Place the pieces into the marker area by nesting themautomatically or interactively. Pieces can be placed automaticallywith the Start Auto Nest command in the Nesting menu. Piecescan be placed interactively by using the various icons, commands,and short cut keys.

• Plot or cut the marker by using the Plot command in the Filemenu.

Marker Definitions (Ctrl+M)

This function specifies options related to the current marker, such as, themarker size, salvages and the fabric spreading method.

Page 216: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual198

To Apply Marker Definitions:

• In the Marker Menu, select Marker Definitions. The MarkerDefinitions dialog box is displayed.

• Select the desired options.

• Enter the desired information.

• Click Ok.

Marker Definitions Dialog Box:

Page 217: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 5: Marker Menu 199

Dimensions

The size of the last marker is saved as the default size for the next marker. Tochange the size, use the Choose Marker option or enter a new width and lengthvalue.

Width

This field defines the width of the fabric.

Length

This field defines the length of the fabric. The length value is only a referencevalue for the maximum length of your cutting table and can be changed at anytime. The waste and efficiency are calculated to the dashed efficiency line.

Number of Plies

Defines the number of plies for this maker. The optimum calculationcommand in the marker menu might suggest changing the number of plies.

Layout Mode

There are four spreading methods that can be used to define a marker:Singular, Tubular, Faced, and Folded. The spreading method will effect thecalculation of piece quantities placed on the marker.

Singular

Singular layout indicates that the fabric will be spread all face up or all facedown.

Tubular (UD)

Tubular layout indicates that the fabric is created in a tube. The pieces can be

Page 218: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual200

folded on the upper or lower edges of the marker. Tubular markers must haveat least 2 plies.

Faced (LR)

Faced layout indicates that the fabric must be spread face to face with folds onthe right and left side. Faced markers must have at least 2 plies. Pieces can befolded on the right and left edges or the maker.

Folded (All)

Folded layout indicates that the fabric has been spread face to face with foldededges on the right and left side. Pieces can be folded on the upper, lower, right,and left edges of the marker. Folded markers must have at least 4 plies.

Total Pieces Area

This field calculates the total area of all the pieces in the marker and displaysthe net area of material needed to place the pieces.

X Origin

The X Origin describes the waste area along the left edge of the marker.

X End

The X End describes the waste area along the right edge of the marker.

Y Origin

The Y Origin describes the waste area along the bottom of the marker.

Y End

The Y End describes the waste area along the top of the marker.

Page 219: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 5: Marker Menu 201

Marker Area with Waste Limits

Waste Limits can be defined for any side of the marker area. This area of themarker can be used as extra space to place pieces when creating a markerinteractively but will not be used when autonesting a marker.

Use Bump lines

Bump lines are used on the marker area as temporary boundary lines. Linescan be placed manually with the cursor or set in the Marker Definition dialogbox. Bump lines are not shown when plotting.

Type of Material

Text entered in the Type of Material field is displayed in the marker header onthe plotter.

Marker List

The marker list display all the markers that save by the OptiMark software.

At the marker list you can change any of the marker parameters (width, lengthand description) by double click on the desire field. One more click on theApply button will bring the marker's dimensions and name to fields in themarker definition dialog box.

Page 220: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual202

Clear Marker (Ctrl+C)

This command clears and resets all pieces from the marker.

To Clear a Marker:

• From the Marker Menu select Clear Marker or press CTRL+C. Aconfirmation dialog box is displayed.

• Click OK to clear the marker.

The dialog box will disappear, and the marker will be cleared. The size list andthe information line will be reset to its initial values.

Remove (DEL or CTRL+R)

This command clears only the selected piece(s) from the marker and sendsthem back to the size list. The size list will be updated accordingly.

To Remove Pieces or Groups:

• Select the desired piece(s) to remove from the marker.

! Tip: Press and hold the Shift key while clicking individual pieces to addthem to the group, or click and drag a box around the group of piecesto remove. If only one piece is being removed from the marker area,double click on the piece.

• From the Marker Menu select Remove, double click on thepiece(s), alternatively press CTRL+R, or press DEL.

All selected pieces will be removed from the marker and will reappear in thesize list.

Page 221: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 5: Marker Menu 203

Piece Parameters

The Piece Parameters box enables you to change parameters for a selectedpiece:

Style Name

This field shows the style (design) name of your selected piece.

! Note: The design file name can be printed at the end of the marker, but itcannot be printed on each piece in the marker.

Page 222: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual204

Size Name

This field shows the size name of your selected piece.

Piece Name

The Piece Name field shows the piece name of your selected piece if theselected piece has a piece name.

! Note: The piece name is changed in the Info dialog box (Piece menu), butcan’t be changed in the Piece Parameters dialog box.

Code

Code Name window shows the Code name of your selected piece. You willsee a code only if your selected piece have a code.

! Note: The piece code is changed in the Info dialog box (Piece menu), butcan’t be changed in the Piece Parameters dialog box.

Description

The description window shows the description of your selected piece. You willsee a description only if your selected piece has a description.

! Note: The piece description is changed in the Info dialog box (Piece menu),but can’t be changed in the Piece Parameters dialog box.

Placement on marker

The Placement on Marker gives the location of a selected piece bycoordinates.

Page 223: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 5: Marker Menu 205

In the X field moves left, center and right. The piece can move horizontally byentering a new coordinate value to one of the three fields.

In the Y field moves top, center and bottom. The piece can move vertically byentering a new coordinate value to one of the three fields.

Flip

If the Flip option is checked the piece will be flipped in the selected fashion. Itdoes not matter whether Mirror Allowed is enabled or disabled in Piece Info.

! Note: The piece is not flipped until the user clicks Ok.

Rotation

The rotation field assigns an angle for the piece to be flipped. Any otherattributes specified for the placed piece are disregarded.

! Note: The piece is not flipped until the user clicks Ok.

! Tip: There are many ways to rotate pieces in OptiMark: the 90/180 icon,the Rotate icon and mouse methods of rotating read the options thathave been defined in the Piece Info dialog box. The Edit Pattern andRotate commands found in the Piece menu do not read the Piece Info.

No. Of Plies Reserved

The No. Of Plies Reserved to the Piece allows the user to control the plynumber on your selected piece.

Page 224: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual206

When changing the ply numbers for a specific piece use the No. Of PliesReserved command. When the number the number of plies change, thenumber of pieces remaining in the Piece Display Bar will change.

The No. Of Plies Reserved To The Piece command, enables the user to planthe spreading table in special cases, for example: a Vest that have three pieces:one back and two fronts, the order for this specific vest will be: 50 S size and50 L size. The number of plies on the spreading table is 100, but only 50 backpieces are needed for each size.

! Note: If the No.Of Plies Reserved To The Piece command is not used, anillegal piece intersection may result and the piece quantities will notbe updated according to the pieces that are locate on the workingarea.

• Selected each of the Back pieces.

• From Marker Menu Select the Piece Parameters option. In theNo.Of Plies Reserved to The Piece window, enter 50 plies for

Page 225: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 5: Marker Menu 207

each of the Backs, now locate the S size on the L size.

! Note: If the number of spreading table plies is only one, the No. Of PliesReserved To The Piece window will be disable.

Legal Intersection

A check in this field allows selected pieces to intersect.

! Note: If there is an intersection between your selected piece and anotherpiece, the piece will be aligned.

Stop before cutting

A check in this field will stop before cutting the selected piece.

Don’t cut the piece

Choose this option and the selected piece will not be cut.

Page 226: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual208

Copy Marker

The Copy Marker command copies the marker to the window clipboard. Themarker can then be pasted into other Windows applications.

Duplicate (Ctrl+D)

Select the Duplicate command to duplicate and place a selected piece(s) on themarker. The duplicate pieces will be deducted from the size list box.

To Duplicate Piece(s):

• Select the piece(s) to duplicate.

• In the Marker Menu select Duplicate or press CTRL+D.

A duplicate of the selected piece(s) will be placed immediately above theoriginal. If there is insufficient room, it will be placed to the right and belowthe original piece.

Page 227: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 5: Marker Menu 209

Array

This function allows one or more pieces that are placed on the marker andduplicated in columns and rows.

To Create an Array:

• Select the piece(s) to duplicate.

• From the Marker Menu select Array. The Array dialog box isdisplayed.

• Enter the desired values.

• Click OK.

Page 228: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual210

Array Dialog Box:

Columns

Enter the number of columns to create. Columns are added to the right of theselected Piece(s).

Row

Enter the number of rows to create. Rows are added above the selectedpiece(s).

X Step

This option allows a distance to be set between the center of the first piece andthe center of the second piece in the X direction. If no step amount is defined,the pieces will duplicate as close to on another as possible.

Y Step

This option allows a distance to be set between the center of the first piece andthe center of the second piece in the Y direction. If no step amount is defined,the pieces will duplicate as close to on another as possible.

Page 229: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 5: Marker Menu 211

Grid X

When this option is enabled, the pieces will duplicate in columns first(horizontal direction). When this option is disabled, the pieces will duplicate inrows first (vertical direction).

Enable Quality Overflow

Enable Quality Overflow allows OptiMark to complete the number of rowsand columns that are specified when not enough pieces exist in the size listbox.

Page 230: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual212

Alignment

The Alignment command is used to place pieces in relation to other placedpieces on the marker.

Horizontal by Marker Center

This command is used to align pieces horizontally along the center of themarker.

• Group the pieces that should be aligned.

• Select Alignment/Align Horizontal by Marker Center in theMarker Menu or press Alt+Ctrl+M.

H

Horizontal by Upper Limit

This command is used to align pieces horizontally on the top of the marker.The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piececlosest to the marker’s upper boundary.

• Group the pieces that should be aligned.

• Select Alignment/Align Horizontal By Upper in the Marker Menuor press Alt+up Arrow key.

Page 231: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 5: Marker Menu 213

Horizontal by Lower Limit (Alt+Down)

This command is used to align pieces horizontally on the lower area of themarker. The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the patternpiece closest to the marker’s lower boundary.

• Group the pieces that should be aligned.

• Select Alignment/Align Horizontal By Lower in the MarkerMenu or press Alt+Down Arrow key.

Horizontal by Piece Center (Alt+Ctrl+H)

This command is used to place the selected pieces in the maker center. Thecenter of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piece closestto the marker’s left boundary.

• Select the pieces to be placed to the marker center.

• Select Alignment/Align Horizontal Piece Center in the MarkerMenu or select Alt+Ctrl+H arrow key.

Vertical by Left Limit (Alt+Left)

This command is used to align pieces vertically on the marker. The center ofselected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piece closest to the leftboundary of the marker area.

Page 232: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual214

• Group the pieces that should be aligned.

• Select Alignment/Align Horizontal by Left in the Marker Menu orpress Alt+Left Arrow key.

Vertical by Right Limit (Alt+Right)

This command is used to align pieces vertically on the marker. The center ofselected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piece closest to theright boundary of the marker area.

• Group the pieces that should be aligned.

! Note: To Create a Group, click and drag a box around the desired pieceson the marker, or press and hold the Shift key and click to add otherpieces to the group. A minimum of two pieces is required to create agroup.

• Select Alignment/Align Horizontal By Right in the Marker menuor press Alt+Right Arrow key.

Page 233: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 5: Marker Menu 215

Vertical by Piece Center

This command is used to tell OptiMark that the marker center will now be thealignment place. The four marker center commands refer to the Alignment atMarker Center.

• Make sure there are no pieces selected or highlighted in themarker area or piece display bar.

• Select Alignment/Align Vertical By Piece Center in the MarkerMenu or press Alt+Ctrl+V Arrow key.

! Note: To Create a Group, click and drag a box around the desired pieceson the marker, or press and hold the Shift key and click to add otherpieces to the group. A group consists of two pieces minimum.

Replace Pieces on Marker

Pieces placed on the marker may be replaced with new pieces after the markerhas been created. For example, if a marker is complete the pocket piece on themarker can be swapped with a different pocket piece (different style). Thepocket piece is pasted into the Marker and then the Replace Pieces on Markercommand is used to swap the old pocket piece for the newly loaded pocketpiece.

! Note: To paste a pattern piece from PDS into the Marker see Help for Filemenu> Open Design File> Cut and Paste a Pattern Piece from PDSinto the Marker.

To Replace Pieces

• Select the piece to replace from the Piece Display Bar. Hold downthe Shift key and select the new piece from the Piece Display Bar.

Page 234: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual216

• From the Marker Menu select Replace pieces on Marker. TheReplace Pieces On Marker dialog box is displayed.

• Optional: Enter the desired Incremental Rotation value or enablethe Mirror option.

• Click OK.

Replace Pieces on Marker Dialog:

Incremental rotation

The replacement piece is rotated by the degrees entered in this field.

Do mirror

If checked, a mirror is created of the replacement piece.

! Note: Use Detect Intersections after using Replace Pieces on Markercommand from the Marker Menu to detect any overlapping pieces.

Page 235: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 5: Marker Menu 217

Substitute

The Substitute command creates a new marker with the same placement layouta previously created marker. For example, you can use the Substitutecommand to make a new pant marker using size small instead of size large.

To Substitute using different sizes:

• Open the marker file from which to take the piece layout of a newmarker.

• From the Marker Menu select Substitute. The Substitute dialogbox is displayed.

• Click Browse and select the design file that is currently placed inthe displayed marker.

• The left side of Sizes Substitution display box displays the oldsize and the right side displays the replacement size. Tosubstitute the replacement size, simply highlight the old size onthe left side of the screen and then highlight the desiredreplacement size on right side of the screen.

• Click OK.

To Substitute using different design files:

• Open the marker file from which to take the piece layout of a newmarker.

• From the Marker Menu select Substitute. The Substitute dialogbox is displayed.

• Click Browse and select the design file that is currently placed in

Page 236: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual218

the displayed marker.

• The left side of Sizes Substitution display box displays the oldsize and the right side displays the replacement size. Tosubstitute the replacement size, simply highlight the old size onthe left side of the screen and then highlight the desiredreplacement size on right side of the screen.

• The left side of Pieces Substitution display box displays the oldpiece names and the right side displays the replacement piecenames. To change the new replacement name, simply highlightthe old piece name on the left side of the screen and then highlightthe desired replacement piece name on the right side of thescreen.

• Click OK.

Page 237: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 5: Marker Menu 219

Substitute Dialog Box:

Cutting, Sewing, or Both

Determines the piece boundary/contour displayed and plotted in the marker.

Browse file to substitute

Defines the design file containing the new pieces.

Current Design File

Displays the design file in the current open marker file.

Page 238: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual220

Sizes Substitution

Defines the new size(s) that will replace the old size(s) in order to create a newmarker.

Pieces Substitution

Defines the new piece(s) that will replace the old piece(s) in order to create anew marker.

Incremental Rotation

Defines a rotation of the pieces before substituting them.

Do Mirror

Allows the pieces to flip before rotating them.

Delete Unused

When Delete Unused is enabled, the pieces from the old marker will deletefrom the Piece Display Bar.

Page 239: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 5: Marker Menu 221

Detect Intersections

The Detect Intersection command checks the pieces for overlaps. Alloverlapping pieces flash on screen and their colors change. The exact point ofthe overlap (intersection) will be indicated by a flashing rectangle.Overlapping pieces return to their initial color only after being moved to anunrestricted location and Detect Intersections is executed a second time.

! Note: You can change the color of an overlapped piece by choosing theColors command in the Options Menu.

Check Current Solution

The Check Current Solution command checks the marker for completesets/bundles, non-complete sets/bundles or overlapped pieces.

Page 240: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual222

To Check a Current Solution

• From the Marker Menu select Check Current Solution. The CheckSolution dialog box will display.

• Enter the desired information.

• Click Detect Intersections, Flash Sets or Flash Remainders.

Black flashing rectangles will indicate the intersections, sets or remainders. Ifnew pieces added or moved causes overlaps, the intersected pieces will blinkagain.

! Note 1: Red dashed lines indicates overlapped pieces. In many cases, theoverlap is detected only by a fraction of a millimeter and the usermay choose to leave the nesting as it is. The same Check Solutioncommand also appears before any print is executed.

! Note 2: The color of each set/bundle can be changed using the Colorscommand found in the Options menu.

! Note 3: The figure indicated in the size list box shows the number of piecesleft to be placed. When the figure in the size list box turns gray, allpieces in the selected size have been placed. When the figure in thesize list box turns dark blue, extra pieces (remainders) were placed inthe marker.

Highlight Selected pieces

This new command helps you to find the selected piece on the marker. Theselected pieces would be displayed in different color then the other pieceson the marker.

Page 241: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 5: Marker Menu 223

Optimize Marker Cut/Plot Order

This command is used to define a portion of the marker to optimize fornumerically controlled (NC) cutting. It is not available until the cut ordernumbers are displayed on the screen. Plotters can plot portions of pieces andthen advance the paper. Cutters must cut the entire piece and then advance thefabric or paper.

! Note: The cut order numbers can be displayed by enabling Cut/Plot Orderin the Display menu, or clicking on the Show Cut/Plot icon.CutterOrdering Dialog Box:

Cutter Ordering Dialog Box:

Page 242: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual224

Shared lines

The Shared Line module is used for Plot, Cutting and other output capabilities.It allows the software to automatically detect shared lines (Common lines)between pieces on the marker. The recognition is made according to followingdefined parameters: Minimum Length of shared line sections, MaximumDistance of the shared lines and Maximum Angle between shared lines (themaximum Angle to be recognized as the same line can be set).

! Note: If files are imported from another system, it is recommended to setthe attribute for the cutting direction and start point of the contour.OptiTex Mark selects a ‘Start Point’ according to the location of thepieces. If a ‘Start Point’ has been established, check the ‘Do notchange’ option in the Cut/Plot Order Optimization dialog box.

Page 243: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 5: Marker Menu 225

Use Frame, X and Y

When Use Frame is enabled, enter the X and Y maximum frame value of thecutter. The cut order numbers will change to meet the frame values.

Optimization Limits

This option limits the pieces that are part of the defined frame size.

Start from Top of Marker

When this option is enabled, the cutter will cut the pieces at the top of themarker before cutting the pieces at the bottom of the marker.

Choose Start Points

When this option is enabled, OptiMark will choose the optimum points for thecutter to begin cutting each piece.

Choose Cutting Direction

When this option is enabled, OptiMark will choose whether to cut each piecein the clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

! Note: The Plot or Cut Order can be changed interactively, simply click thepiece to cut or plot first. The piece chosen will change the cut orderon the marker and will become number one. Move to the piece tocut/plotted next, click on it and continue this process for every point.

! Note: If you already created a cutting sequence for your marker and youwant change the sequence (you missed a piece), use “Shift” keytogether with the mouse cursor to insert a piece into cutting sequence.

Page 244: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual226

Selected Piece Cut Order

Selected Piece Cut Order can be used to interactively define where thenumerically controlled (NC) cutter starts to cut the pieces and whether piecesare cut clockwise or counter clockwise

! Note: The cut order numbers can be displayed by enabling Show Cut/PlotOrder in the Display menu.

To Optimize the Piece:

• In the Marker Menu, click Select Piece Cut Order to display TheCut Order Optimization dialog box. OptiMark will default tocutting the entire piece in the clockwise direction.

• Use the dialog box to change the start and end points, cuttingdirection, tool, etc.

• OPTIONAL: To make multiple traces, select Add, the secondtrace will be added. Use the dialog box to change the start andend points, cutting direction, tool, etc. Before adding the thirdtrace, make sure the trace that is to be split is displayed, thenselect Add.

• After all traces have been added and edited, click Ok.

Page 245: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 5: Marker Menu 227

Cutting Order Optimization Dialog Box:

Sequence Number during Cutting

Displays the order in which the piece will be cut. Change the order bychanging the sequence number.

Set to All Same Pieces

When this option is enabled, all of the same pieces will have the same cutting

Page 246: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual228

attributes. When this option is disabled, only the cutting attributes on thecurrently selected piece will be changed.

Current Trace

A piece can be cut in many different cut segments. For example, one curve onthe piece should be cut counterclockwise and the rest of the piece should becut in the clockwise direction. The Current Trace field displays the currentpath that is being edited.

Starting Point

The arrow on the piece indicates the cutter start point for the current trace. Thearrows are used to change the start point. If Optimum is checked, the optimumstarting point is set by the software. If Default is checked, the start point willdefault to the original position that was the first point digitized or the pointdefined in PDS.

Ending Point

This field displays the ending point for the current trace.

Cutting Direction

If checked, the current trace will be cut in a clockwise direction. If unchecked,the current trace will be cut in a counter-clockwise direction.

Tool

Indicates the tool to be used when cutting the current trace.

Enable Multiple Cutting of Segments

When enabled, one trace can be cut more than once, each time with a differenttool. This is very important when cutting metal.

Page 247: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 5: Marker Menu 229

Optimum Calculations

OptiMark finds the right marker length and number of plies to create the mostefficient marker with the least waste. The initial calculations are based on thetotal area needed or the total length of material required according to theefficiency reached. These parameters and information are a basis for change.After checking the results, decisions can be made regarding what width orlength of material to choose.

To Perform Optimum Calculations:

• In the File Menu, select Open Design Files to load a DSN file.

• Define the material type and order values for each size in theOrder for Marker Making dialog box.

• In the Marker Menu, select Marker Definitions to define themarker width, length and spreading method. The Marker Area andEfficiency Evaluation dialog box is displayed.

! Note: It is recommended to place at least one set (two or more sizes arerecommended). This displays an indication of the real efficiency,which can be achieved for the current job.

• In the Marker Menu, select Optimum Calculations. Verify orchange the selected parameters.

• Click “Calc”.

• Click Close

Page 248: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual230

Marker Area and Efficiency Evaluation Dialog Box:

Area Usage

This field is used to enter the target efficiency percentage of the marker. Forexample, enter 80 in the area usage window and then click “Calc” to the left ofNumber of Plies. The value in the Number of Plies window will display thenumber of plies necessary to place all the pieces in the defined marker widthand length. If the Area Usage and Number of Plies is entered, the length themarker required to place all the pieces in the marker with the defined numberof plies and efficiency is displayed.

Estimated Total Area

The value listed in this field shows the total area of all the pieces in the markermultiplied by the efficiency percentage entered.

Page 249: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 5: Marker Menu 231

Estimated Total Length

This value is the estimated total area divided by the width of the marker.

Marker Length

The default value field is taken from the Marker Definitions dialog box in theMarker Menu. The estimated total area, the number of plies, and the markerwidth are used to determine the value.

Marker Width

This value is taken from Marker Definitions in the Marker menu.

Number of Plies

The default value in this field is taken from the number of plies defined in theMarker Definitions dialog box. Click “Calc” to the left of Number of Plies tocalculate the needed number of plies. The value is determined by the markerlength, marker width, and estimated total area.

Plies Calculations

This command is used to calculate and find the optimum number of pliesneeded for a cutting job. The number of plies will be calculated based on thenumber of pieces. If the division is not exact, the letter R (for Remainders) islisted in the Size List and Piece Info dialog box.

! Note: OptiMark calculates the optimum number of plies according to thenumber of pieces, with minimum remainders.

Page 250: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual232

Weights

Selecting this option displays the Weights dialog box. Enter the weight of thefabric. The box below displays the total area and weight of fabric needed forall the pieces.

Bump/Cut lines

This command enables you to create multiple bump lines with draw and cutattributes as well as a vertical overcut.

Page 251: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 5: Marker Menu 233

To crate bump or cut line:

• Point the cursor on the marker table borders

• Clicks and drag line from the edges.

• Place the lines on the marker table.

• From the marker menu select “BUMP/CUT lines” command

• In the Bump/Cut line dialog box you can edit the exactcoordinates of the lines and to change the attribute of them byselecting the desire option.

• Click “apply”. And then OK

! Note: cut or bump lines can be added from the dialog box by clicking on theadd button and entering the new line coordinates.

! Note: The “cut bump line” is used for cutting between the pieces andmarker borders. OptiTex marker will never cut a bump line on apiece even if the bump line attribute is cut

Fabric Pattern

Use the Fabric Pattern command to create a bitmap image of the actual fabricdisplayed in the marker area.

Page 252: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual234

Fabric Pattern Dialog Box:

View

This area defines how the bitmap will display in the marker area.

Disable

If checked, no bitmap is displayed.

Marker

If checked, the bitmap is only displayed on the marker area.

Selected Pieces Only

If checked, the bitmap is only displayed on the selected piece.

All Pieces On Marker

If checked, the bitmap is displayed on all the pieces in the marker.

Matching Fabrics Into Pieces

This command will display the chosen fabric instead of the piece color.

Page 253: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 5: Marker Menu 235

Pattern Length (X Value)

This value represents the length of the repeated bitmap on the X dimension.The bitmap will be scaled to fit in this length.

Pattern Height (Y Value)

This value represents the width of the repeated bitmap on the Y dimension.The bitmap will be scaled to fit in this width.

Bitmap File

This field defines the bitmap file.

Load Fabric Dialog Box

The new dialog box “Fabric Pattern” provides the user with the ability toconnect fabric pattern (bitmap) to a specific material type.

To crate a material file:

• Use “Load Fabrics” button from the initial fabric pattern dialogbox.

Page 254: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual236

• Click on the “Add” button.

• Enter the material type name or choose from the list of materials.

Page 255: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 5: Marker Menu 237

• Click OK

The new materiel will be added to the list in the fabric pattern dialog box.

To connect the new material type to a pattern (bitmap):

• Click on the bitmap file filed, a small arrow will appear

• Click on the arrow in order to select the desire fabric pattern.

• Select the type of the graphic file (choose between: BMP, JPG,PSD and more)

• Click on the desired file, the preview of the pattern will show onthe dialog box.

• Click OK

• The material files save box will appear

• Enter the file name in the Material Info File field.

Page 256: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual238

• Click SAVE

To change the marker material type.

• Open the piece info dialog box from the piece menu (you can useCtrl + I as shortcut).

• Chose the new material type from the material field.

• Click apply

• The marker will apply the pattern connected to this material type

Page 257: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 5: Marker Menu 239

Stripe Definition

This command is used to define stripes, plaids, or floral prints on the marker,simulating a repeated design. The Stripe Definition option is used when youare marking material with a special design that must appear on the piece in aspecific place. It ensures that the piece will be cut correctly with the repeateddesign.

! Note: The auto-nesting procedure does not take the Stripe Definition optioninto account.

To Define Stripes:

• In the Marker Menu, select Stripe Definition. The StripesDefinitions dialog box is displayed.

! Tip: The Stripe Adjust option located in the Options Menu must be enabled.

• Verify or change the selected parameters.

Page 258: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual240

• Click Ok.

! Note: Select the Hide Stripes option in the Options Menu to display only afraction of the horizontal and vertical lines around the border of themarker.

Stripes Definitions Dialog Box:

Start X

The Start X distance value defines the beginning of the first X stripe (plaid).This is measured from the left edge of the marker.

Start Y

The Start Y distance value defines the beginning of the first Y stripe. This ismeasured from the bottom line of the marker.

Page 259: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 5: Marker Menu 241

Distance <F>

The distance between the vertical stripes (plaid lines).

Angle From Vertical (deg)

If an angle other than 90 degrees is needed, enter the desired value.

Distance <E>

The distance between the horizontal stripes.

Angle From Horizontal (deg)

If an angle other than 180 degrees is needed, enter the desired value.

A, B, C, D Measurements

These measurements could be use to define diagonal stripes instead of enteringvalues for angles.

Stripe Adjust According To Set Only

If unchecked, the next bundle placed will match in the same way that theprevious bundle of the same size matched. If checked, the next bundle placedwill not match the stripes unlike the previous one.

Revise Pieces Placements on Marker

Use this option to maintain pieces strips while you send your marker towindows printer.

Page 260: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual242

To Add or Edit Stripe Adjust Notches or Buttons

• Decide which pieces in your DSN file match.

• Mark the match point on the pieces with notches or buttons.

• The Notches and Buttons must be assigned Stripe Adjustnumbers. To ensure that all future markers receive the same stripeadjust numbers, it is best to make the notch and button edits inOptiGrade. If the attributes were not specified with OptiGrade,you can use the Notch icon to edit the stripe adjust number inOptiMark.

• Numbers 1 through 4 can be used for stripe adjust numbers. Thematch points that line up must be assigned the same stripe adjustnumber and notch or button type. For example, if the side seamsof the front and back should line up, add the same type of notchon both pieces in the matching location, and assign a stripe adjustnumber of one. If the front has a patch pocket that lines up on theright side, add a button to the front and to the pocket, and assign astripe adjust number of one or two.

! Note: Matching points can also be defined using the Fabric and Stripescommand in OptiGrade.

• When the first piece is placed in the marker, the second piece willlook at the first piece to determine where it needs to be located.All pieces placed on the marker which have the same notchnumber will be placed at the same coordinates of each repeatedstripe as the first piece.

• When stripe adjust according to sets is disabled, the next bundleplaced will match in the same way that the previous bundle of thesame size matched. When stripe adjust according to sets in

Page 261: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 5: Marker Menu 243

enabled, the next bundle placed will match any way that the userrequests. If stripe adjust according to sets in enabled and the firstbundle placed was Related to Stripes, the next bundle placed willmatch in the same way that the previous bundle of the same sizematched.

• You cannot have several like notches with the same stripenumbers on the same piece. You can have different notches (V,U’s etc.) with the same stripe numbers on the same piece.

! Note: If you would like the stripe adjust point (notch or button) to match toa particular stripe junction, follow the To Relate Pieces (With StripeAdjust Notches Or Buttons) To A Stripe instructions later in thischapter

Relate Piece to Stripes (Shift+Home)

This function is used to lock a piece to a specific area on the fabric.

! Note: The auto-nesting procedure will not relate pieces to stripes.

Numbers 1 through 4 are used for stripe adjust numbers. The match points thatline up must be assigned the same stripe adjust number and notch or buttontype. For example, if the side seams of the front and back should line up, addthe same type of notch on both pieces in the matching location and assign astripe adjust number of one. If the front has a patch pocket that lines up on theright side, add a button to the front and to the pocket, and assign a stripe adjustnumber of one or two. All pieces placed on the marker which have the samenotch number will be placed at the same coordinates of each repeated stripe asthe first piece.

There cannot be several like notches with the same stripe numbers on the samepiece, however, different notches (V, U’s etc.) can appear with the same stripenumbers on the same piece.

Page 262: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual244

To Relate Pieces (Without Stripe Adjust Notches or Buttons) To a Stripe:

• Define the stripe distances using the Stripe Definition commandin the Marker Menu.

! Note: The distance is always measured from the selected point to theclosest stripe line down (Y distance) and to the left (X distance).Select test to view the step amount before making the changes.

• In the Options Menu, enable the Stripe Adjust option.

• Place the pieces on the marker area.

• When working with a piece that must be adjusted to a specificstripe junction, place it in the correct location.

• In the Marker Menu, select Relate Pieces To Stripes or press Shift+ Home. The Relate Pieces to Stripes dialog box is displayed. Apoint on the piece will be shown with a X. This X is the matchingpoint. To change the matching points use the arrows in the dialogbox and move the X around the piece.

• Type the distance of the highlighted point from the X and Ystripes.

• Click Ok.

To Relate Pieces (With Stripe Adjust Notches Or Buttons) To a Stripe:

Place a notch or button with numbers from 1 to 4 at a specific distance to astripe junction. These values can be determined for either the X or Ydirections.

• Define the stripe distances using the Stripe Definition option inthe Marker Menu.

Page 263: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 5: Marker Menu 245

! Note: The distance is always from the selected point to the closest stripeline down (Y distance) and to the left (X distance). Select test to viewthe step amount before making the changes.

• In the Options Menu select the Stripe Adjust option.

• Place the first pieces on the marker area. All pieces placed on themarker which have the same stripe adjust number will be placedat the same coordinate as the first piece.

• If the first piece placed should be located on a specific stripe line,place the piece in the approximate desired location.

• In the Marker Menu, Select Relate Pieces To Stripes or pressShift +Home. The Relate Pieces to Stripes dialog box isdisplayed. A point on the piece will be shown with a X. This X isthe matching point. To change the matching points use the arrowsin the dialog box and move the X around the piece.

• Type the distance of the highlighted point from the X and Ystripes.

• Click Ok.

! Note: The distance is always from the selected notch or button to the closeststripe line in X distance and in Y distance. The notch and buttonnumbers, which you see in the dialog box, refer to the availablenotches.

Match ++ ™

Match ++ is a completely automatic nesting system for matching pieces tostripes and plaid fabrics. Match ++ is ideal for any product with matched

Page 264: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual246

fabric requirement. It is a powerful tool for working with striped and plaidedfabrics, railroad or flow matched fabrics.

Math ++ combines highly advanced mathematic algorithm together withartificial intelligences methods.

The speed of Match ++ makes it beneficial for estimating pre-productioncosting as wall as manual and automated production cutting.

Match ++ offers a quick and affordable way to save both time and money.

The match ++ will start automatically when starting automatic nesting and ifthe stripe adjust option in the option menu is checked.

To run the match ++ module:

• From the MARKER menu select the stripe definition command todefine the plaids and stripes on the marker.

• From the OPTION menu check the STRIPE ADJUST Commandin order to display stripes on the marker.

• From the NESTING menu click on the START AUTO-NESTcommand.

• The MATCH ++ dialog box will display. Enter in the maximumnesting time in minutes.

Page 265: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 5: Marker Menu 247

• Click OK.

The automatic nesting process will act according to the adjust commandswhich assigned to the pieces.

Undo (Ctrl+Z)

The Undo command reverses the most recent changes. This command cancelsthe last 20 operations step by step.

Redo (Ctrl+Y)

Use the Redo command to inverse the most recent action. This commandcancels the last 20 operations, one at a time.

Page 266: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual248

Page 267: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 6: Group Menu 249

Chapter 6: Group Menu

The Group Menu allows the user to treat several pattern pieces on the markeras one unit. The pieces will move as a group until a different piece is selected.All of the grouped pieces will move simultaneously by clicking inside one ofthe grouped objects and dragging it to the desired location. Most commandsand tools that work on one piece will also work on a group of pattern pieces.

To Create a Group:

• Click and drag a box around the selected pieces on the marker ORpress and hold the Shift key while clicking selected pieces to begrouped. A minimum of two pieces is required to create a group.

! Note: Folded pieces in tubular markers cannot be part of a grouped section

Substitute size for selected pieces

Substitute sizes for selected pieces command enable the user to substituteplaced pieces size without nesting again pieces.

You can replace placed pieces size simply:

• Select the piece/pieces on the piece display bar.

• Go to group menu Substitute size for selected pieces command(you can use F9 shortcut).

• All the selected pieces will change their size to a bigger size onyou size list.

If your selected pieces size is already the biggest size in size list, the selectedpieces size will change to smallest size on you size list.

Page 268: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual250

! Note: It’s recommended to run “Renest” command from nesting menu afteryou replaced placed pieces size.

Keep

The Keep function groups selected pieces together. The grouped pieces will bedisplay with a dashed line around them on the Marker and will display as theirown piece on the Piece Display Bar. This group can be placed andmanipulated on the marker as if it were a single piece.

To Keep a Group:

• Click and drag a box around the selected pieces on the marker ORpress and hold the Shift key while clicking selected pieces to begrouped.

• From the Grouping Menu, select Keep.

Page 269: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 6: Group Menu 251

! Note: After placing a “kept” group, the pieces will move as a group until adifferent piece is selected or another group is placed.

Ungroup

The Ungroup function disables grouped pieces. Once the Ungroup commandis selected, the group will no longer be displayed in the Piece Display Bar andthe individual pieces will return to their original Piece Display Boxes.

To Ungroup Pieces:

• Select the group to disable.

• In the Grouping Menu, select Ungroup.

Fix on Marker

The Fix On Marker function permanently groups pattern pieces on the markeruntil the group is disabled with one of the Unfix functions. When part of thefixed group is selected, the whole group will highlight and move as a singleobject.

To Fix a Group on the Marker

• Click and drag a box around the selected pieces on the marker ORpress and hold the Shift key while clicking selected pieces to begrouped.

• In the Grouping Menu, select Fix On Marker.

Unfix Selected

All pieces that were in the selected group will be disabled and can be placedindividually on the marker.

Page 270: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual252

To Unfix a Selected Group on the Marker:

• Select the group or groups to disable.

• In the Grouping Menu, select Unfix Selected.

Unfix All

Select the Unfix All command to release the all fixed groups on a marker.

• In the Grouping Menu, select Unfix All.

Stripe Adjust Group (Ctrl+G)

This command is used to ensure that if a piece is re-positioned within thefloral, stripe, or plaid marker area, the piece will match to the other placedpieces.

To Create a Stripe Adjust Group

• Position the pieces that relate to one another on the marker area.

• Select the group of pieces.

• In the Grouping Menu, select Stripe Adjust Group.

When a piece in the Stripe Adjust Group is moved, the piece will always snapto a similar location.

Page 271: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 6: Group Menu 253

Rectangular Block Fuse (Ctrl+B)

The Block Fuse function creates separate Fusing (Cutting) zones.

• Select the pattern piece or pieces from which to create a blockfuse.

• In the Grouping Menu, select Block Fuse.

Only pieces that were marked entirely in the box would be included in theblock.

! Note: A folded piece can not be block fused.

When Plot is selected in the File Menu, the Block Fusing dialog box isdisplayed.

Page 272: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual254

• The All Nested Pieces function plots all the pieces with thedrawn blocks.

• The Marker Without Blocks function plots the marker withoutthe blocks drawn.

• The Marker With Block Spaces functions plots the markerwith block spaces.

• The Contain All Blocks function plots only the contents ofthe blocks.

• The Contain of Selected Block function plots selected blockfuses.

Page 273: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 6: Group Menu 255

Thrifty Block Fuse

This feature enables the user to create a "thrifty" block fusing as opposed to arectangle block fusing; this limits fabric waste and the user can still create ablock fusing on selected pieces.

• Click and drag a box around the area you want to create a thriftyblock fuse from.

• Choose from “Grouping” menu “Thrifty Fuse” option.

Only pieces that were marked entirely in the box would be included in theblock.

! Note: Thrifty fuse will be disabled to a folded piece.

Optimum Block Fuse

This feature ables the user to create an "optimize" block fusing according tothe selected piece shape, allows for following the selected piece contours sothe user can decrease the fabric waste while creating a block fusing.

Click and drag a box around the area you want to create a block fuse from.

Choose from “Grouping” menu “Optimum Block Fuse” option.

Only pieces that were marked entirely in the box would be included in theblock

Select Whole Bundle

This command enables the user to select a complete bundle by selecting anypiece within the bundle

Page 274: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual256

Unify Pieces Orientation

This command enables the user to unify piece orientations within bundleaccording to one selected piece orientation within the bundle.

Substitute One Bundle

This command allows the user to substitute one bundle with another bundle.This is very useful in cases where a mistake has been made in one bundle.

Copy Size for Selected Pieces

This command allows the user to select several pieces and copy the size for allof them at the same time.

Page 275: Mark User Manual- optitex

``Chapter 7: Display Menu 257

Chapter 7: View Menu

Pieces on Marker

Select the Pieces on Marker command to determine the specific informationthat is displayed on the screen and printed on output.

To Display Pieces on Marker:

• In the Options Menu, select Pieces on Marker. The Display Pieceson Marker dialog box is displayed.

• Select the desired options.

• Click OK.

! Note: If the box to the left of the option is checked, it will be displayed onscreen and printed on output. Click once to place a check and selectthe option. Click again to remove the check.

Display Pieces on Marker Dialog Box:

Page 276: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual258

Pieces Tab:

Pieces

Original Contour

If checked, the original contour of the pattern piece is visible on the screen.This option is used mainly on a buffered piece when only the buffered contourshould be displayed and printed.

Buffered Contour

If checked, the buffered contour of the pattern piece is visible on the screen.This option is used on a buffered piece when the buffered contour should bedisplayed and printed.

! Note: There are several ways to display a piece or pattern buffer. Theoriginal piece can be displayed, the buffer only can be displayed, orboth the original piece and the buffer can be displayed together onscreen.

! Tip: See Edit Piece and Piece Info in the Piece Menu to learn how to addand remove buffering.

Fill with Color (Ctrl+F)

If checked, a particular size will Fill With Color. Colors are set in the OptionsMenu. If there are no color set, the default color will be used.

Colors According to Bundles

If checked, the pattern piece is displayed in color according to set or bundle.When the Colors According to Sets command is unchecked, the piece colorwill be displayed according to size. Colors are set in the Options Menu.

Page 277: Mark User Manual- optitex

``Chapter 7: Display Menu 259

Text in Real Scale

If checked, the text and descriptions is displayed on the screen with the samescale that the text will plot. When Text in Real Scale command is unchecked,the text and descriptions will display on the screen so that it is readable.

Descriptions:

Style Name

If checked, the style name specified in the Order for Marker Making dialogbox is displayed on the screen and printed on output. The Order for MarkerMaking dialog box is displayed when loading a Design file from the FileMenu.

Piece Name

Determines whether or not the piece names specified in the Piece Info dialogbox will be displayed on the piece with the output.

Piece Code

If checked, the Piece Codes specified in the Piece Info dialog box is displayedon the screen and printed on output.

Piece Description

If checked, the Piece Description specified in the Piece Info dialog box isdisplayed on the screen and printed on output.

Size Name

If checked, the Size Name is displayed on the screen and printed on output.

Page 278: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual260

Bundle Code

Determines whether or not this the set/bundle name displays on the piece withoutput

Placement’s Info:

Tilt Angle

If checked the amount that each piece has been rotated or tilted is displayed onthe screen and printed on output.

Internals Tab Objects:

Notches

If checked, the notches are displayed on the screen and printed on output.

Points (Buttons)

If checked, drill holes are displayed on the screen and printed on output.Buttons with Cut, Drill, or Aux. Drill attributes will plot as a circleapproximately 3/8” in diameter. Buttons with a Draw attribute will plot as acircle with a cross hair in the center.

Notch and Point Numbers

If checked, the Stripe Adjust numbers are displayed on the screen and printedon output.

Tools/ Layers

Determines whether or not the Tools or Layers will be displayed on the piecewith output

Page 279: Mark User Manual- optitex

``Chapter 7: Display Menu 261

Internals By Tools:

Draw, Sew

All internals that will be drawn with the pen tool are displayed with a commonon the screen and printed on output.

Cut (punch)

All internals that will be cut with the cut tool are displayed with a common onthe screen and printed on output.

Drill (aux drill)

All buttons and notches that will be cut with the drill tool are displayed with acommon color on the screen and printed on output.

Quality

All internals that are defined with a Quality attribute are displayed with acommon color on the screen and printed on output.

None

All internals that are defined with a None attribute are displayed with acommon color on the screen and printed on output.

Internals:

Baseline

If checked, the baseline is displayed on the screen and printed on output.

Page 280: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual262

Contours, Lines, Arcs, Circles

If checked, the internal point lines, draft lines, and circles are displayed on thescreen and printed on output.

Pleats

If checked, the pleat and axis lines are displayed on the screen and printed onoutput.

Darts

If checked, the dart points and dart apex are displayed on the screen andprinted on output. The dart in OptiMark is not displayed or printed as a fullydrawn dart.

Text

If checked, the internal text on a piece is displayed on the screen and printedon output. This text can be helpful when including last minute instructions tothe operator. This does not effect the text found in the Descriptions section ofthis dialog box.

Page 281: Mark User Manual- optitex

``Chapter 7: Display Menu 263

Cut/Plot Order

The Cut/Plot Order displays the order in which the pattern pieces will be cut orplotted. Double click the right mouse button on a blank area of the marker tocheck and uncheck this option. The Cut/Plot Order can be changed using theOptimize Cutting Order and Selected Piece Cutting Order commands in theMarker menu.

Stripes Lines

If checked, the stripes on the marker are hidden. When this command isactivated, only a hint of the stripe around the edge of the marker is displayed.

Marker Full Length

If checked, the entire length of the marker is scaled to fit on the screen. Ifunchecked, the width of the marker is scaled as wide as possible on the screen.Right and left scroll bars are displayed to so the length of the marker can beviewed.

Page 282: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual264

Zoom All Pieces on Marker

If checked, the marker area containing placed pieces will be scaled to fit on thescreen.

Piece Bar

Select this command to display the Piece Display Bar.

Size Lists

Select this command to display the Size List box. The size list box is locatedbelow the Piece Display Bar.

<+> = 90° Rotation allowed (4 way)

<-> = 180° Rotation allowed (2 way)

<^> = All Rotation allowed (anyway)

<U> = Up/Down Folding allowed

<S> = Left/Right Folding allowed

Page 283: Mark User Manual- optitex

``Chapter 7: Display Menu 265

<L> = Locked piece for Automatic nesting

<B> = Buffer is declared

<R> = Remaining pieces after plies’ calculations

<F> = Final Placement for Automatic nesting

<H> = Filling Holes as default for Automatic nesting

<M> = Mirror allowed

! Note: If there are more than five (5) sizes, use the up/down arrows to scrollthrough the sizes.

Page 284: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual266

Spread Marker

Select this command to display Spread Marker. All the pieces are displayed alongthe top of the marker with the quantity and size name.

! Note: If the piece quantity is zero, the piece will be without color (if there isa color) and the piece contour will be dash line.

! Tip: You can also drag or use double click command to bring pieces thatare located on the spreading table to the working area.

Piece List

If checked, the Piece List dialog box is displayed. The first column of thePiece List dialog box represents the piece number, the second columnrepresents the piece name, the third column is used for the size name, and thefourth column represents the number or pieces still left to be placed. Use thescroll bars to scroll up and down the dialog box. To place a piece from thePiece List dialog box, double click on the piece name you would like to place.

Page 285: Mark User Manual- optitex

``Chapter 7: Display Menu 267

Zoom View Window

The zoom view window helps you to specify the zoom spot. The zoom viewwindow displays the full length marker and on the marker itself you will seethe zoom area.

Use the hand cursor to drew the zoom rectangle

Tool Bars

If checked a list of Toolbars is displayed allowing the user to manipulatewhich Toolbars are displayed. In the toolbar dialog box, the user can choosebetween large or small buttons (icons), ToolTips enabled or disabled, and theconventional appearance or the new “cool look.”

Page 286: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual268

New Toolbar

OptiMark gives you the option to create toolbars and customize them to yoursneeds.

To create and customize toolbar give the toolbar name and click o.k.

Page 287: Mark User Manual- optitex

``Chapter 7: Display Menu 269

Customize

OptiMark gives you the option to create toolbars and customize hem to yoursneeds.

You can customize an original or new toolbar:

Reset

Click on this button to reset the highlight toolbar name. The toolbar will backto the original form.

Page 288: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual270

View the Status Bar

This command will display or hide the Status Bar line (in the marker bottom).

! Tip: to edit the information on the status bar select the Preference dialogbox in the Option menu.

Page 289: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 8: Options Menu 271

Chapter 8: Options Menu

The Options menu allows the user to set up the screen according to theirpreference.

Stripe Adjust

This command acts as an on/off toggle switch when working with Stripe,Plaid, and floral material. When activated, all same-type pieces will beadjusted to match the relative stripe coordinates of the first piece placed on themarker. The matching point for the pieces are determined by using notches orbuttons with stripe adjust numbers from 1 to 4 or by using the Stripe AdjustGroup (see Marker Menu for Stripe Definition and Relate Pieces to Stripescommands and Group menu for Stripe Adjust Group).

!!!! Note: If several pieces in a style have the same stripe adjust number, allpieces will be adjusted to the same relative position.

Single Piece Gap

This command acts as an on/off toggle switch when working with a predefinedSingle Gap. To define a Single Gap, select Preferences in the Options Menuand enter a value in the Single Gap field.

Page 290: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual272

Single gap enables temporary Gap (Buffer) around a single piece duringmanual mouse: Slide or Shooting. The Gap is created during the Shootfunction and will stay with the piece. For permanent Gap, use the Gap functionin the ‘Preference’ dialog box. The Gap value is defined in the ‘Marker’ menuat the ‘preferences’ dialog box. To enable or disable the function use thecommand ‘Single Piece Gap’ from the ‘Option’ menu.

Page 291: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 8: Options Menu 273

Limit Rotation

This command acts as an on/off toggle switch for using the rotation andflipping limits defined in the Piece Info, All Sizes Info and the Global PieceInfo dialog boxes. If unchecked, the pieces act as if no rotation limits havebeen defined.

Round After Rotation

The Round After Rotation command acts as an on/off toggle switch to controlthe manual rotation value of a piece when rotating with the mouse. When thecommand is activated, the piece will jump to the nearest 90-degree angle(within a range of 8 degrees from the initial position).

Page 292: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual274

Colors

This option specifies different colors for the OptiMark elements.

To Choose General and Size Colors:

• In the Options Menu, select Colors. The Color Selection dialog boxis displayed.

• Select the Object Type you want to change General, Sizes, orBundles.

Page 293: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 8: Options Menu 275

• Select an item to change the color. The item name is displayed inthe Object Name field.

• Select a color from the color palette displayed in the dialog box.

• Click OK.

Many colors can be changed before exiting this dialog box. In your OptiMarkor Windows directory, there is a file called OPTIMARK.CLR. This filecontains the color definitions for OptiMark and OptiGrade.

To Define Bundle Names and Colors:

• In the Options Menu select Colors. The Color Selection dialog boxis displayed.

• Select Sizes and select the size to define bundles for.

• Select Bundles and in the Object Name field type the name of thefirst bundle.

• Select ADD.

• Select the color of your choice for the first bundle.

• Repeat steps 3 through 5 adding each bundle for the selected size.

• Repeat steps 2 through 6 to define bundles for each size.

• Select OK.

Page 294: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual276

Fonts

The Choose Fonts dialog box allows the user to customize the program to suittheir particular needs. Once a new font is selected the piece text or generalselections will be updated immediately.

Marker fonts prefer (TT) True Type fonts. It is important to have the correctfonts and printer driver for your printer so that the correct font size and formatprint. For some printers it is crucial to install the original printer driver and nota substitute. While regular printer fonts are specific and supplied by Windows,the output font to the plotter is a vector text, which is supported by OptiMark.

!!!! Note: This command uses the fonts found in your Windows directory.

The font type can be changed in the OptiMark or OptiGrade section of theOPTIKAD.INI and saved to the file in the same directory. The different fontstyles appear in the OPTIKAD.INI file. It is possible to edit this file with a texteditor like Windows Notepad, which creates an ASCII file.

Text output to the plotter or printer can be different from the text, which isdisplayed on the screen. Plotter fonts are available in different languages byusing the appropriate PLOTTER.FNT file. For complete output support in alltext options and languages, use the PLOTTER.FNT file.

!!!! Note: OptiMark supports text rotation, but not mirrored text, becauseWindows does not support mirrored text.

!!!! Note: Mirrored text is supported on the plotter with our own fonts, or byplotters which have a built-in mirror fonts option. The plot file issent to the plotter with this option.

Page 295: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 8: Options Menu 277

To Select or Change a Font:

• In the Options menu, select Fonts. The Choose Fonts dialog boxis displayed.

• Select the type of font you want to change. The respective Fontdialog box will be displayed.

• Select the desired font style and size.

• Click Apply. Click OK to exit the Font dialogs box.

• Click Close in the Choose Fonts dialog box.

Choose Fonts Dialog Box:

Page 296: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual278

Restore Default changes all displayed font types, styles, and sizes to thefactory settings.

!!!! Note: In your OptiMark or Windows directory, you should have a filecalled WIN.INI. This file contains the font definitions for OptiMarkand OptiGrade.

Working Units

Working Units specify whether measurement type will be used in the software.The types include millimeters, centimeters, meters, inches, feet, or yards. Thedefault working units appear in the OPTIKAD.INI file. While using Import orExport of Cad Cam files different working unit can be defined, but the changewill be applicable only for the Import and Export options.

Page 297: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 8: Options Menu 279

Preferences

This dialog box is used to define Options related to OptiMark.

Status Line Tab:

The information to be displayed in the status line at the bottom of the screen.Check each element to display in the status line and uncheck to exclude.

Page 298: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual280

Options Tab:

Check Style files before Opening

If this option is checked OptiMark will compare the date of the most recentdesign file to the date of the design file used to make the existing marker filebefore opening an existing marker file. If the dates are different a dialog boxwill display.

Use the first piece name as Style file name

Use this command when the style file is without a name. The software will beusing the first piece names as style file name.

!!!! Note: If unchecked, style files without names will be stay without names.

Merge Marker Vertically

If checked, markers will be merged side by side (default) or one over the other.

Page 299: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 8: Options Menu 281

Multi Line Piece Description

Check this box to enable piece description to be more then one line

Bubble Info

The bubble info can used to give a description of pieces with no need to openthe attribute box. The bubble info pops up when the mouse courser points onthe elements. Check this box to enable the bubble info.

Auto Extract from Intersections

Use this option to avoid intersection while nesting manually. In case ofintersection the nested piece will “jump” from placed piece.

Notch Depth

Sets the default Notch Depth for all notches that are added using the Notchtool in OptiMark.

Notch Width

Sets the default Notch Width for all notches that are added using the Notchtool in OptiMark.

Button Size

Sets the default Button Size for all buttons on the pattern pieces.

Text Size

Sets the default Text Size for all text added using the Text tool in OptiMark.

Page 300: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual282

General Tab:

Auto Save Interval

Define the time interval for the automatic save for your files. The AutoSaveoption saves only the file that is currently open. It creates a backup titledBACKUP.DSP.

The BACKUP.DSP file can be opened through the Open Marker File dialogbox. This file can be opened if you forget to save a file before shutting thesystem down or if the system is shut down incorrectly. After loading thebackup and inspecting its contents you can save it again under the original filename.

The directory in which your BACKUP.DSP file is saved is determined in yourOPTIKAD.INI file. When installing the program for the first time, you will beasked where you want to place your \TEXWORK\EXAMPLES directory. Thisis where your BACKUP.DSP will be located.

Page 301: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 8: Options Menu 283

The AutoSave command is not intended to make backup copies of your files.It is designed to create a single backup copy of the file you are currentlyworking on if your system crashes or is improperly shut down.

Move step by cursor key

Define the jump step value for moving a piece on the marker by the keyboardcursor.

Tilt Step

Use this area to define the amount a piece should be rotated each F11 and F12is selected. To define the maximum amount that a single piece can be tilted,refer to the Piece Info dialog box.

Block Buffer Size

This command is used to define your Block buffer size when you use the“Block Fuse” command in the Grouping menu.

The “Block Fuse” command is used to define the cutting area around selectedpieces. To define the Block buffer size around your selected pieces (the framearound the pieces), go to the Preferences dialog (in the option menu) to “Blockbuffer size” and fill in the desirable size to the Block buffer.

Adjust Gap

Sets a constant default gap between pieces when the Adjust, Adjust Rotate,and Insert to Hole tools are used in the marker area.

Single Piece Gap

Sets the gap between pieces when the Adjust, Adjust Rotate, and Insert toHole tools are used in the marker area. The Single Piece Gap must be checkedin the Options Menu for this function to be applied on the marker.

Page 302: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual284

Log File Tab:

Page 303: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 8: Options Menu 285

Log File

This option writes Marker information to a log file that contains informationabout the marker, number of pieces placed, and material usage. The log filecan then be used for tracking what was plotted. To view the log file, use a texteditor or select Solutions Reports from the Nesting menu.

Click on the Browse button to locate where the log file will be saved.

Page 304: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual286

Post Saving Action /Export to ASCII Application

The program Exp2asci.exe is a small application that will enable the user toread the header information of OptiTex DSN and DSP files. The Exp2asci willconvert the header information to an ASCII format, which will enable it to beread by electronic spreadsheet (Excel, Lotus 1-2-3, Quattro etc.). The programworks in Win95 environment and can be run from DOS prompt and fromWindows Run or Explore. By changing the Properties parameter you can runthis program every time you send a file. The main screen looks like this:

The user should fill two fields (if they are empty) and press Start. The programkeeps the name of your previous output file and uses it next time by default. Ituses the name of current DSP or DSN file. The program reads the input fileand appends the information to the output file. It is possible to convert manyfiles in one session. In order to end a work session press End. The programwill not start if one of two fields is empty.

Error messages:

Page 305: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 8: Options Menu 287

Please check that the input file does exist and full path is correct.

The file exists but it is currently used by another application. The Exp2asciprogram can’t work with it. Please close the file or select other name foroutput file.

To Disable the Post Saving Action uncheck Run this Application after Save

AutoSave (Backup) file

Locate the place in your hard drive to save the backup file by clicking on thebrowse button.

Page 306: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual288

Page 307: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu 289

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu

The Nesting menu includes commands for automatic nesting solutions.

Stop

When the automatic process begins, a clock icon will be displayed indicatingthat automatic placement is in process. To stop the Auto-nesting procedure,choose Stop from the Nesting menu. The Nesting process will be halted andonly those pieces already nested will stay on the marker.

The Auto-nesting procedure stops only after the current piece is placed on themarker. In cases where the current piece is complicated, or the solution task isvery large, it may take some time to stop the Auto-nesting procedure. Once theAuto-nesting procedure has been halted the user may change the PieceAttributes, move the nested pieces and place new pieces. The new attributeswill be taken into account when the Auto-nesting procedure is resumed. SelectContinue from the Nesting menu to resume the nesting in progress.

To Stop Auto-nesting:

• In the Nesting Menu, select Stop.

Continue

This command enables the user to place some pieces on the marker and letOptiMark place the rest of the pieces. Select the Continue command toresume the automatic nesting procedure after auto nesting has been stopped.

To Continue Nesting:

• In the Nesting Menu, select Continue.

Page 308: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual290

!!!! Note: OptiMark will continue nesting pieces. If the Fill Holes option isenabled, OptiMark will check the previously placed pieces and fillall necessary holes before continuing.

!!!! Tip: Ctrl+Alt+S continues the nesting process without filling holes.

Start AutoNesting

This command starts the automatic nesting procedure.

!!!! Note: This option requires an empty marker. If there are pieces already onthe marker you will be asked to clear it.

To Start Auto-Nest:

• In the Nesting Menu, select Start AutoNesting.

The marker will begin filling with pieces and will continue until all pieces inthe file have been placed. To stop the Auto-nesting in process, select Stopfrom the Nesting Menu. Refer to the explanation earlier in this chapter formore information on stopping the Auto-nesting in process.

Page 309: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu 291

Auto Nest Selected Pieces

To activate this command, at least two sizes and/or pieces must be selected inthe Piece Display Bar. Only the pieces and sizes selected will be autonested.

!!!! Note: To select multiple pieces and/or sizes in the Piece Display Bar, holddown the shift key and select each piece and/or size in the PieceDisplay Bar.

Auto Nesting To Separate Block

This feature provides the ability to nest pieces from the same sets/bundles inseparate blocks and dividing the marker table to separate stripes according topiece's sets/bundles.

Renest Pieces on marker

This option is available only with Nest++™ module. Use Renest Pieces onmarker option to nest with Nest++™ pieces that already are placed on theworking area.

Compact Arrangement

Allows to for the most compact arrangement of pieces on the Marker.

Page 310: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual292

Click Ctrl+J to get better nesting result after the automating nesting hadfinished.

Duplicate Marker

Select the Duplicate Marker command to duplicate all currently placed pieces.With this command, the duplication will be made up to the marker limit,which is defined in the Marker Definitions command in the Marker menu.

The Duplicate Marker command may create a situation where there are notenough pieces to fill the entire marker. In this case the number of pieces willbe increased and appear as a negative (-) number, you will have remainderscut.

Auto Nesting Setup

The AutoNest Setup enables the user to select one way of the nesting optionfrom several options. It is also possible to create a list of markers to nest andcompare the results with different material width. A comparison table will becreated for verification purposes.

Page 311: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu 293

Standard

Auto nesting produces better marker efficiencies by allowing the system thetime needed to create a good nest.

Nest++

Is an optional add-on application to OptiMark with fantastic result. Theefficiency is based on the duration that the automatic algorithm will run. Theaverage time needed to get a good nest should last about 15 minutes for amarker with 50 to 80 pieces. A good nesting can be reached also after 2 or 3minutes.

Quick

The Quick command enables OptiMark to nest the pieces as quickly aspossible. OptiMark will not spend a lot of time trying to find the best possibleefficiency.

Nesting According to Bundles

While the Nesting According to Sets command is enabled, OptiMark will nestthe pieces by sets/bundles and sizes. OptiMark will mix pieces from differentsets, but will do its best to complete one set first before moving to the next set.

When this command is disabled, OptiMark will place pieces according to thesquare area of the piece, placing larger pieces first.

Unify Orientation Within Bundles

This feature enables you to unify piece orientation within bundles or set inorder to create a complete bundle/set with the same orientation while usingNest ++.

Page 312: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual294

Unlimited Marker Length

The Nest++ will ignore the marker length as it display in the markerdefinitions. Check this box to assure that all the pieces will fit in to the marker." Nest ++ "will find the best nesting solution and the shorter marker.

Auto Save of Markers

Enabling the Auto Save of Markers command will divide one order intoseveral markers when necessary. Reasons to use this feature include: when thefabric can only be spread so long due to shading, lack of spreading tables, orthe fabric is sold in sheets.

If the autonesting marker becomes full (no additional pieces can be placedwithin the marker limits) then a second marker will be created. The markerlimit is defined in the Marker Definitions command in the Marker Menu. Thenew marker will be given a name that is similar to the initial file name, but thelast two letters will be changed to a dash (-) and a number.

For example, if the original file is titled MARKER.DSP, all overflow files willbe given the name(s) MARKER-1.DSP, MARKER-2.DSP and so on.

There are two options with the Auto Save of Markers command.

• Save the placed (full) marker with all the unplaced pieces listed inthe Piece Display Bar. The next marker will also list the previouslyplaced pieces in the Piece Display Bar.

• Save the placed (full) marker with zero remainders listed in thePiece Display Bar. The next marker will list only the unplacedpieces in the Piece Display Bar.

!!!! Note: The same option exists in the File menu with the Save CurrentNesting command.

Page 313: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu 295

To Enable Auto Save of Markers

• In the Nesting Menu, select Auto Save of Markers. The SaveCurrent Nesting dialog is displayed.

• Enter the file name.

• Click OK.

!!!! Tip: If the original marker was saved with zero remainders, the originalremainders can be updated. Select Open Design Files from the Filemenu, double click on each of the Design files listed and select OK.

Save Current Nesting Dialog Box:

Browse

Click on the Browse button to specify a name for the original DSP (marker)file. The additional DSP files will have the same name followed by a hyphenand a number.

Page 314: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual296

Write Reports to File

Enabling this option will allow the marker information to be reported to thelog file each time a marker is saved or plotted. Click on Change Log tospecify a name for the ASCII log file.

Create NST-file (cncKad) too

NST is one of the file formats that are used in the “cncKad” system. Byenabling this command, a NST file will automatically be created each time theDSP file is saved.

Save only nested parts (and zero remainders)

When this command is enabled, the original marker will be saved with zeroremainders, only the new marker will have the unplaced pieces listed in thePiece Display Bar.

Compact Arrangement (Ctrl J)

Allows to for the most compact arrangement of pieces on the Marker.

Duplicate Marker

Select the Duplicate Marker command to duplicate all currently placed pieces.With this command, the duplication will be made up to the marker limit,which is defined in the Marker Definitions command in the Marker menu.

The Duplicate Marker command may create a situation where there are notenough pieces in the Piece Display Bar to fill the entire marker. In this case thenumber of pieces will be increased allowing remainders to be cut and anegative (-) number will be placed in the Piece Display Bar.

Page 315: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu 297

Solutions Reports

Select the Solutions Reports command to view and/or print a report. Theinformation in this *.LOG file includes details of the saved markers. One LOGfile can include reports for many different files.

The LOG file is an ASCII file, where each piece of information appears with aspecific key letter allowing you to send the information to other applications.The LOG file can be defined in the Save Current nesting command in the FileMenu or the Auto Save of Markers in the Nesting Menu.

!!!! Note: To create a log file checks first the “Write reports to file” box inPreferences dialog box under the Options Menu.

To View and Print the Log File:

• Select Solutions Reports from the Nesting Menu.

• Use the Browse button to ensure that the correct log file isdisplayed.

Page 316: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual298

Solutions Reports Dialog Box

This dialog box displays the date, length, width, number of plies, efficiency,and spreading layout for each saved marker. The most recently saved markerwill be displayed at the top of the list.

Total

The total button is used to view an average efficiency and total number of pliesfor a selected group of saved markers. Hold down the shift key to select themarkers you would like to average and select the total button.

Page 317: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu 299

Print

The Print button is used to generate a printed report of the displayed log file.

Details

Select one marker from the log file listed and click Details. The solutionsreport details dialog box for the selected marker is displayed.

Solutions Report Details Dialog Box

Selected Design File

A drop down box is displayed listing all the design files in the current marker.Detailed information about the selected design file is displayed in the boxesbelow.

Page 318: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual300

Top Box

This field displays the total area and perimeter for all pieces in each size.

Bottom Box

This area displays the total area and perimeter for each piece and size.

Print All

Print All will print a report for each design file contained in the selectedmarker file.

This option is enable only when two or more markers were merged (FileMenu, select Merge Several Markers option.)

In the Solution Report dialog box:

• Select the last file from the Solution File Name list.

• Click on the Details button.

• Click on the Print All buttons.

Print

Print will print a report of the selected design file contained in the selectedmarker file.

Start Batch

Rather than use the menus, a batch files can be created to request markers,auto- nest, import files, export files, and plot files. A Batch holds a series ofcommands, each of which are divided, into three sections: the command, amessage attached to the command, and a value. The use of the Batch

Page 319: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu 301

Command files enables a set of commands to be executed by OptiMarkwithout an operator at the computer.

To Start a Batch:

• In the Nesting menu select Start Batch. The Batch dialog box isdisplayed.

• Enter the File Name or select Browse to find the desired file.

!!!! Note: It is recommended that OptiMark Batch Command files be createdwith a .BTF extension. Message-files have a .MSG extension.

• Enter the message to accompany the file or select Browse to find thedesired message.

• Select or enter the desired information and click OK.

• Click OK to exit the Batch dialogs box.

!!!! Tip: Select Import setup to display the Import setup dialog box.

Page 320: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual302

To Create a Batch Command File:

A Batch can hold a series of commands, each of which is divided, into threesections: the command, a message attached to the command, and a value.Listed below is a list of the various Batch commands.

@<Command> [[/]<Keyword>=<Value>] ... [; <Commentary>]

or ;<Commentary>

Batch Commands:

@! or @EOF End of Batch-file performing.

Page 321: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu 303

@PAU[SE] Stop of Batch process. Use menu to continue.

[/MSG=<message text>] Must not content ‘,’ and ‘>’ symbols.

@SET Sets value to OPTICAD.INI - file.

/SEC[TION]=<Section name>/KEY[WORD]=<Keyword>

/VAL[UE]=<Value>

@UNI[T] Set working units.

/CM | /MM | ME[TER] | /IN[CH] | /FE[ET] | /YA[RD]

@NEW Delete all patterns and clear marker.

[/NA[ME]=<title>]

@OPE[N] Opens (or merges) marker file.

/FI[LE]=<file-name>[/ME[RGE]]

@SAV[E] Saves results in marker file.

[/FI[LE]=<file-name>] File-name is selected or generated

[/LO[G]={NO | YES}] Use Log-file

@DES[IGN] Open DSN-file.

/FI[LE]=<file-name>

[/SE[AM]={C[UT] | S[EW] | B[OTH]}]

[/OR[DER]=<Order number>]

Page 322: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual304

[/MA[TERIAL]=<Material>]

[/SI[ZE]=<size-name>

[/QU[ANTITY]=<No.of sets of the size>]

@IMP[ORT] Import one file.

/FI[LE]=<file-name>

/FO[RMAT]=<file-format>DXF, AAMA, IGES, CADL(CadKey),DFT(cncKad), GERB(Gerber Cutter), HPGL

[/UN[IT]=<Units>] CM, MM, ME[TER], IN[CH], FE[ET], YA[RD]

[/CL[EAR]={NO | YES}] Clears marker before import.

[/SI[ZES]={NO | YES}] “Use Sizes” (as button in Import dialog)

[/DS[N]={NO | YES}] Saves Design file

[/GB[UF]=<Buffer size>] Sets buffer size

[/GD[IR]=<Rotation allows>]

1(None), 2(PI), 4(PI/2), 0(All enable)

[/GM[IR]=<mirror allows>] 0, 1(Allow)

[/QU[ANTITY]=<Quantity>]

[/MA[TERIAL]=<Material>]

@EXP[ORT] Export.

/FI[LE]=<file-name>

Page 323: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu 305

/FO[RMAT]=<file-format> DXF, AAMA, CADL, IGES

[/X[SC]=<X-scale>]

[/Y[SC]=<Y-scale>]

/NS[PLINE]={NO | YES}}]Using splines and polylines

[/SP[ST]=<spline step>] Step for spline line export (only if /NS=YES)

[/NA[RC]={NO | YES}] Using arcs

[/ARCN[UM]=<Lines>] Max no.of lines for arc (only if /NARC=YES)

[/ARCB[ULGE]=<bulge>] Bulge for arc lines (only if /NARC=YES)

@PLO[TTER] Plotting to file.

/FI[LE]=<file-name>

/FO[RMAT]=<file-format>DMPL, CYBCUT(Cybrid Cutter/Plotter),CYB(Cybrid Plotter), IOLS, HPGL, HP2(HPGL/2), HPTEC(HPGL PlotTec),HPGEN(HPGL Generic),WILD(Wild Cutter/Plotter), WLDPL(WildPlotter),APGL(Gerber Plotter), MICRO(MicroJet Plotter),GERB(GerberCutter), CEDGE(Cutting Edge), EAST(Eastman Cutter)

[/X[SC]=<X-scale>]

[/Y[SC]=<Y-scale>]

[/SC[ALE]=<type>] SPG(single page), MPG(multi page), FSC(fixed scale)

[/PGX=<Page size X>]

[/PGY=<Page size Y>]

Page 324: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual306

[/SP[ST]=<spline step>] Step for spline line plotting

[/ARCB[ULGE]=<bulge>] Bulge for arc lines

[/NOTE=<note text>] Title for draft

[/FONT[FILE]=<font file name>]

[/F[ONT]SIZE=<font size>]

[/BIF={YES | NO}] Using built-in font for plotter

[/PEN[NUM]=<No.of pens>] No.of pens (colors)

[/[MIN]LINE=<min line length for plotter>]

[/GAP=<Gap after plotting length>]

[/OUTM[AN]={YES | NO}] Using Output Manager

[/COP[IES]=<No.of copies>] No.of copies for Output Manager

[/ALS[TART]={YES | NO}] Alert on Start in Output Manager

[/ALE[ND]={YES | NO}] Alert on End in Output Manager

[/RME[ND]={YES | NO}] Remove file on End in Output Manager

[/ONEP[AGE]={YES | NO}] Plot all draft on one page only

[/CEN0={YES | NO}] Is (0, 0) of Plotter in center of Page

[/MAN[FF]={YES | NO}] Using manual Page Advance

[/OVER[LAP]={YES | NO}] Using continues / overlapping pages

Page 325: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu 307

[/BORD[ER]={YES | NO}] Plot Border of Marker

[/[AUTO]MOT[ION]={YES | NO}] Prepare Moving Optimization

@MAR[KER] Set marker size parameters.

[/LE[NGTH]=<length>] Marker dimensions

[/HE[IGHT]=<height>]

[/XO=<x-left>] Margins

[/XE=<x-right>]

[/YO=<y-bottom>]

[/YE=<y-top>]

[/PL[Y]=<No.of plies>] Plies

[/MA[TERIAL]=<Material>] Material

[/FV={NO | YES}] Marker full view mode

@CLE[AR] Clear marker.

@GLO[BAL] Set global pieces parameters.

[/TO[OL]=<Tool/Layer name for pieces external contour>]

[/HT[OOL]=<Tool/Layer name for piece holes>]

[/IT[OOL]=<Tool/Layer name for internal contours>]

[/NT[YPE]=<Notch type> T, V, I, L, U, P

Page 326: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual308

[/NM[ODE]=<Notch mode> D[RAW], C[UT], P[UNCH]

[/PM[ODE]=<Point mode> D[RAW], C[UT], DR[ILL], ADR[ILL]

[/SI[DE]=<Side label> L[EFT], R[IGHT], B[OTH], LB, RB

Below is the same to @IMPORT command.

[/GB[UF]=<Buffer size>]

[/GD[IR]=<Rotation allows>]

[/GM[IR]=<Mirror allows>]

[/QU[ANTITY]=<Quantity>]

[/MA[TERIAL]=<Material>]

@NES[T] AutoNesting (works as Continue command).

/AL[GORITHM]=<algorithm-type>

QUI[CK], QUA[LITY], TEX[TILE], NES[TER], COM[PACTION]

[/TI[ME]=<time>] Time (minutes) for textile and nester algorithms

The batch file extension is *.BTF. Listed below are some example batchesfiles.

@UNIT /CM

@NEW

@IMPORT /FO=IGES /FILE=p1001.igs

@SAVE /FILE=p13001.dsp

Page 327: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu 309

@NEW

@SET /KEY=Bulge /VAL=0.045

@IMPORT /FO=IGES /FILE=p153029.igs

@SAVE /FILE=p153029.dsp

@NEW

@IMPORT /FO=IGES /FILE=p143027.igs

@SAVE /FILE=p143027.dsp

@!

The batch file shown above first defines the units of measure as centimeters,imports the IGES file p13001.igs and saves it as P13001.dsp. Next IGES filep153029.igs is imported with a bulge tolerance of .045 and saved asp153029.dsp. Last IGES file p143027.igs is imported and saved asp143027.dsp.

@UNIT /IN

@NEW

@MARKER /LENGTH=450 /HEIGHT=54 /PLY=3

@DESIGN /FILE=C:\TEXWRK\EXAMPLES\STRIPES.DSN /SEAM=CUT

/MATERIAL=STRIPES /SIZE=S /QUANTITY=4 /SIZE=M /QUANTITY=2/SIZE=L /QUANTITY=1 /SIZE=XL /QUANTITY=1 /SIZE=XXL/QUANTITY=2

@SAVE /FILE=C:\TEXWRK\EXAMPLES\TESTBAT.DSP

Page 328: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual310

@NEST

@SAVE /FILE=C:\TEXWRK\EXAMPLES\TESTBAT.DSP

@!

The batch file shown above first defines the units of measure as inches, createsa new marker with a maximum length of 450 inches, a width of 54 inches, and3 plies. The design file stripes is opened with cut lines and material groupstripes is defined. 4 small sizes, 2 size mediums, 1 size large, 1 size extralarge, and 2 size extra, extra large are requested. The newly requested markeris saved as testbat.dsp. The new marker is then auto nested and saved.

@NEW

@OPEN /FILE=C:\TEXWRK\EXAMPLES\SPANT.DSP

@CLEAR

@NEST

@SAVE /FILE=C:\TEXWRK\EXAMPLES\SPANT.DSP

@!

The batch file shown above first starts a new job, then opens an existingmarker named SPANT.DSP. The pieces are cleared from the existing markerand auto nesting begins. Once auto nesting is compile, the marker is saved asSPANT.DSP

Stop Batch

To stop the Start Batch procedure, select Stop Batch from the Nesting Menu.The Batch process is halted.

Page 329: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu 311

Continue Batch

Select the Continue Batch command to resume the batch procedure afterselecting Stop Batch.

Batch Messages

The Batch message file includes all remarks and errors that appear whileactivating the Batch option. It will allow the user to follow Syntax errors whilerunning the batch file.

AutoNest Queue

The AutoNest Queue command prepares a queue of Marker files, which canbe left to nest overnight. A list of marker (DSP) files is created in a table andto define Marker width, Maker Length, Time to Run.

It is also possible to select the method of nesting from Quick, Standard, orNest++.

To select files to the nest queue:

• Click on the first file field and a little arrow appears.

• Click on the arrow to browse you drive to select the desire file.

Page 330: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual312

• You can select more then one file using the shift or the Ctrl key.

• Click OK and the files will be added to the queue .

!!!! Tip: To give all the files the same max. time point the mouse pointer tothe desired maximum time in one of the files and click on the rightbutton. Chose "equal all" and all the max. time will be equal in allfiles.

Queue Menu

Save and Open Queue Files

The queue can be saved to disk as "autoNest queue file" (. nst) Open the savedfile from this menu.

Run

Select this command in order to start nesting the files in the queue.

Clear

This command clear the selected files from the queue list.

Page 331: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu 313

Stop

This command stop the nesting process.

Export to Excel

The result can be exported to excel and help you to investigate, print and mailthe nest result.

Import to Excel

Queue can be imported from excel file. It bring you the option to crate a queueon excel sheet or receive nest queue by e-mail and loaded it to the Optimark.

Close

Will close the multi nest dialog box

Page 332: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual314

Page 333: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 315

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

This chapter will guide how to install and configure a width range of plottersand cutters types that supported by OptiTex.

Installing Algotex Plotters with SGS Software

Installing the Algotex Software

• Turn off the computer.

• Connect the plotter cable to the parallel port (LPT2) on thecomputer.

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

• Create a directory called C:\TEXOPLOT\DATA

• Copy all the files on the Algotex diskette into the C:\TEXOPLOTdirectory.

The Algotex diskette contains the following files:

AUTO_DOT.EXEAUTO_DOT.CNFAUTO_DOT.HLPAUTO_DOT.TXTRASTEX.EXETEXOPLOT.ICOREADME.DOCREADME.TXT

• Copy the ALGOTEXP.CFG file into the C:\TEXOPLOT directory.

Page 334: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual316

! Note: The ALGOTEXP.CFG file can be found on the diskette attached tothe plotter.

• Create a directory called C:\OPTITEX\HPGL

• Select START, SETTINGS, TASKBAR, START MENUPROGRAMS, ADD.

• BROWSE for and OPEN the following file.C:\TEXOPLOT\RASTEX.EXE

• Select NEXT. Select the OptiTex Program Group. Type RASTERas the program name and select FINISH.

• Select ADD, BROWSE for and OPEN the following file.C:\TEXOPLOT\AUTO_DOT.EXE

• Select NEXT. Select the OptiTex Program Group. Type PLOT asthe program name and select FINISH.

• Select ADVANCED, under Start Menu, select the plus (+) sign tothe left of the word “Programs.” Highlight the OptiTex ProgramGroup. Copy (hold down the shift key and drag) the RASTERprogram and PLOT program on the right side of the screen to theSTARTUP folder on the left side of the screen. You can nowCLOSE.

• Using a text editor, edit the following file.C:\TEXOPLOT\AUTO_DOT.CNF

• Change the Recovery directory to C:\OPTITEX\HPGL and changethe Raster Data files directory to C:\TEXOPLOT\DATA

Page 335: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 317

• Save the changes to the AUTO_DOT.CNF file and return to theWINDOWS desktop.

• Restart the computer. Select START, SHUTDOWN, RESTARTCOMPUTER.

Configuring the Alogotex Plotter in SGS software.

Once the Algotex software is installed, the SGS software can be configured towork with the plotter.

• Start the SGS PDS or MARK program.

• From the FILE menu choose PLOTTER SETUP. A Dialog Box isdisplayed.

• Uncheck “Use Output Manager.”

• Select OK.

• If in working in PDS, display a piece on the screen. If working inMARK, display a marker on the screen.

• From the FILE menu select PLOT. Select SETUP from the lowerleft side of the dialog box.

• In the Plot Setting Dialog Box select HPGL as the format. InPlotter Page Size, the X must be _____ and the Y must be the widthof the paper (72 inches is the maximum).

• Select OK, the Plot Dialog Box is once again displayed. Make surethat the following settings are unchecked while testing: OutputManager, Use, Alert on Start, Remove on End, Alert on End.

• Select OK.

Page 336: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual318

Hewlett Packard 600 or 700 Ink Jet Plotter

Connecting the plotter

• Turn off the computer.

• Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer. If your HP InkJet only came with a parallel cable, it will be necessary to order anRS232 serial cable from Hewlett Packard or from your plotterdistributor. A generic cable will not work. Your plot files will notplot on the HP Ink Jet unless you are using a cable from HP.

! Tip: Serial ports are usually referred to as COM ports and can be identifiedas COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4.

! Note: Any serial port can be used. However, keep in mind that on manycomputers COM ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ (InterruptRequest), and COM ports 2 and 4 share the same IRQ. If you havemore than 3 serial devices you may need to change the IRQ settingfor one of the COM ports to avoid an IRQ conflict. For detailedinformation on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows manualsfor your system.

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Page 337: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 319

Configuring the output manger

Using the Outman as output manger:

• From the START menu click OUTMAN from OptiTex sub-menu.

! Note: The OutMan will be named Outman-1 (or OutMan-2 if you specifiedthe plotter as pltr2.)

• From the OPTIONS menu, choose WORKING UNITS. Theworking units dialog box will display.

• Choose the appropriate setting.

• Click OK.

• From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. TheCommunication dialog box will display. Set the following portoptions:

Port - Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.Baud Rate - 9600Data Bits - 8Parity - NoneStop Bits - 1Flow Control - XON/XOFFProtocol - NONE

• Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display.

• Enter the Width and Length of the paper.

• Click OK.

Page 338: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual320

! Note: If the exact length of the paper is unknown, estimate. The length ofthe paper needs to be longer than the plot file that will be plotted.

• Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close theOutman.

Configuring Qman

• Open the QMan by double clicking on the icon in the STARTmenu. Usually located in START>Optitex 8> Output control>Qman

• From the FILE menu, choose WORKING UNITS.

• Select the appropriate working units. The selection should matchthe working units that were set in the SGS Plot setup dialog box.

OutMan Path Setup

• From the FILE menu, choose PLOT SETUP. The OutMan Setupdialog box will display.

• The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be thesame as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:

• Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the listof available drive/directories on the right.

• Click OK.

• Minimize the QMan keeping it running. Do not close the Qman.

Page 339: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 321

Using the OCC as output manger

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

• Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

• Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the STARTmenu.

• In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

• In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

• Select the “my computer” option. Click NEXT.

• In the “Communication Setting” select the following:

Port - the port to which the plotter is connected

Port - Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.Baud Rate - 9600Data Bits - 8Parity - NoneStop Bits - 1Flow Control - XON/XOFFProtocol - NONE

• Click NEXT.

Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue foldermust be located in the same partition as the OCC application. Click onthe BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

Page 340: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual322

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users andcomputers automatically. Using other operation system needs toshare the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

• Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

• Close or minimize the OCC window.

Configuring the SGS programs

Plotter Setup

The Plotter Setup command in SGS Grade, PDS, and Mark is used to selectthe location of the OutMan.ini file and the plotter to be used.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the workingarea.

• Place a pattern on the working area.

• From the FILE menu, choose the PLOT command

• Check the Use Output Manager field.

• Select the output manger that you using.

• For Outman users: Put the correct Outman.ini Path and plotternumber in the OUTMAN MANAGER field. Select OK.

• Click OK.

Plot

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box willdisplay.

Page 341: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 323

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the workingarea.

Use Output Manager - This option must be enabled to send a plot to theplotter.

Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings areoptional. For detailed information on each of these options refer to the Plottingchapter of the user’s manual, or the plotting tutorial.

Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale.

Options - Set to Plot Continuous.

Scale Factor - Set to X=1, Y=1.

Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.

• Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.The Plot Setting dialog box will display.

Plot Setting

Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The plotter numberdepends on how many plotters were identified during the SGS softwareinstallation process.

Format - Plotter Language. Set to HPGL/2.

Device Options

(0,0) in Page Center and Manual Page Replace – both are disabled(unchecked).

Page 342: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual324

Pens - Set to 1.

Font Options

Use Plotter’s Built-in Font - Should be enabled (checked).

Plotter Font File - Should show the Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory. If nofont file is shown, select Browse to locate the file.

Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the headerof the plot.

Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completedplots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots.

Minimal Cut/Plot Line - .008

Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arcto be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may beadjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. For now set at .008

Plotter Page Size

X - The X value is the marker length. It should be set to larger than the lengthof your longest expected marker. However, this setting may be adjusted forunusually long markers.

Y - The Y value should always be set to 35.5 inches (maximum plot width.)

Page 343: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 325

! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount ofpaper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 35.5 inches. There isno way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If thissetting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or notplot at all.

• Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box. The pieces on theworking area will be sent to print on the plotter.

Hewlett Packard 750C Ink Jet Plotter

Connecting the plotter

• Turn off the computer.

• Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer. If your HP InkJet only came with a parallel cable, it will be necessary to order anRS232 serial cable from Hewlett Packard or from your plotterdistributor. A generic cable will not work. Your plot files will notplot on the HP Ink Jet unless you are using a cable from HewlettPackard.

! Tip: Serial ports are usually referred to as COM ports and can be identifiedas COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4.

! Note: Any serial port can be used. However, keep in mind that on manycomputers COM ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ (InterruptRequest), and COM ports 2 and 4 share the same IRQ. If you havemore than 3 serial devices you may need to change the IRQ settingfor one of the COM ports to avoid an IRQ conflict. For detailedinformation on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows manualsfor your system.

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Page 344: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual326

• Be sure that the Page format in the HP750C Menu is set to InkedArea. Please see attached diagram from the HP 750C QuickReference Guide.

Using the Outman as output manger:

• From the START menu click on the OUTMAN in the OptiTex 8folder.

• From the OPTIONS menu, choose WORKING UNITS. Theworking units dialog box will display.

• Choose the appropriate setting.

• Click OK.

• From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. TheCommunication dialog box will display.

Port OptionsPort = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.

Baud Rate = 9600Data Bits = 8Parity = NoneStop Bits = 1Flow Control = XON/XOFFProtocol = NONE

Paper Size

• Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display.

• Enter the Width and Length of the paper.

Page 345: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 327

• Click OK.

! Note: If the exact length of the paper is unknown, estimate. The length ofthe paper needs to be longer than the plot file that will be plotted.

• Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close theOutman.

Configuring Qman

• From the START menu click on the QMAN in the OptiTexdirectory.

• From the FILE menu, choose WORKING UNITS.

• Select the appropriate working units. The selection should matchthe working units that were set in the SGS Plot setup dialog box.

• From the FILE menu, choose OPTIONS. The OutMan Setup dialogbox will display.

The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the same asspecified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:

• Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the listof available drive/directories on the right.

• Click OK.

• Minimize the QMan keeping it running. Do not close the Qman.

Page 346: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual328

Using the OCC as output manger

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

• Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

• Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the STARTmenu.

• In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

• In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

• Select the “my computer” option. Click NEXT.

• In the “Communication Setting” select the following:

Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.Baud Rate = 9600Data Bits = 8Parity = NoneStop Bits = 1Flow Control = XON/XOFFProtocol = NONE

• Click NEXT.

• Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queuefolder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

Page 347: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 329

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users andcomputers automatically. Using other operation system needs toshare the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

• Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

• Close or minimize the OCC window.

Configuring the SGS programs

Configuring the plotter through the SGS programs involves selecting a plotter,configuring the plotter, and configuring the OutMan and the QMan. Thisdocument gives basic settings and configuration instructions used for HP 750plotters. For a detailed description of the plotting options, refer to the Plottingsection of the SGS Grade, Mark, or PDS manual. Also, refer to the plottingtutorial located at the front of each manual.

Plotter Setup

The Plotter Setup command in SGS Grade, PDS, and Mark is used to selectthe location of the OutMan.ini file and the plotter to be used.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the workingarea.

• From the FILE menu, choose PLOT command.

• Check the “USE OUTPUT MANGER” options.

• Select the Output manger to use.

• For OutMan users: browse to locate the outman.ini file. And enterthe plotter number.

Page 348: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual330

Plot

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box willdisplay.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the workingarea.

Output Manager

Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter.

Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings areoptional. For detailed information on each of these options refer to the Plottingchapter of the user’s manual, or the plotting tutorial.

Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale.

Options - Set to Plot Continuous.

Scale Factor - Set to X=1, Y=1.

Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.

• Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.The Plot Setting dialog box will display.

Plot Setting

Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The plotter numberdepends on how many plotters were identified during the SGS softwareinstallation process.

Format - Plotter Language. Set to HPGL/2.

Page 349: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 331

Device Options

(0,0) in Page Center and Manual Page Replace – both are disabled(unchecked).

Pens - Set to 1.

Font Options

Use Plotter’s Built-in Font - Should be disabled (unchecked).

Plotter Font File - Should show the Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory. If nofont file is shown, select Browse to locate the file.

Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the headerof the plot.

Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completedplots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots.

Minimal Cut/Plot Line - .008

Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arcto be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may beadjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. For now set at .008

Plotter Page Size

X - The X value is the marker length. It should be set to larger than the lengthof your longest expected marker. However, this setting may be adjusted forunusually long markers.

Y - The Y value should always be set to 35.5 inches (maximum plot width.)

Page 350: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual332

! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount ofpaper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 35.5 inches. There isno way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If thissetting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or notplot at all.

• Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box.

• Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but theplot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not beensetup.

Troubleshooting for the HP Ink Jet 750C

Make sure the I/O settings on the plotter have been setup. For instructions,refer to the HP user manual. Settings should correspond with the port optionsused in SGS software when configuring the OutMan. (See section,“Configuring Outman” under “Communication.”)

Be sure that the Page format in the HP750C Menu is set to Inked Area. Pleasesee attached diagram from the HP 750C Quick Reference Guide.

Page 351: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 333

From the HP750C Quick Reference Guide

Front-Panel Menu (On Plotter) Structure

Page Format -> Size -> Oversize -> Inked Area

Page 352: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual334

Configuring the Hewlett Packard Draftmaster II Plotter

The HP Draftmaster II (model #7596A) plotter will not plot more than oneframe. A frame is 46 inches long.

Connecting the plotter

• Turn your computer off.

• Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer.

! Tip: Serial ports are usually referred to as COM ports and can be identifiedas COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4.

! Note: Any serial port can be used however, keep in mind that on manycomputers COM ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ (InterruptRequest), and COM ports 2 and 4 share the same IRQ. If you havemore than 3 serial devices you may need to change the IRQ settingfor one of the COM ports to avoid an IRQ conflict. For detailedinformation on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows manualsfor your system.

• Turn the computer on.

• Turn the plotter on.

Page 353: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 335

Configuring SGS Programs

Plotter Setup

! Note: To access the Plot command you must have a piece in the workingarea.

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT command. The plot dialog boxwill be displayed.

• Enable the USE OUTPUT MANGER by clicking the box next tothe Use Output Manager option. A small “x” should appear in thebox.

• For OUTMAN users: locate the outman.ini file by selecting theBrowse button. Select the directory that contains the OutMan.inifile.

• Select the Plotter number you want to assign to the HP plotter (i.e.Pltr1, Pltr2, etc.)

• Click OK.

Plot

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will bedisplayed.

! Note: To access the Plot command you must have a piece in the workingarea.

Output Manager

Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter.

Page 354: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual336

Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings areoptional. For detailed information on each of these options refer to the Plottingchapter of the user’s manual, or the plotting tutorial.

Page Format - Page format should be set to Fixed Scale.

Options -

Plot Continuous - enabled

Scale Factor - Should be set to X=1, Y=1.

Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.

• Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.The Plot Setting dialog box will be displayed.

Plot Setting

Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of Pltrlisting depends on how many plotters you specified during your OptiTexsoftware installation.

Format - Plotter Language. Should be set to HPGL

Device Options

(0,0) in Page Center - enabled

Manual Page Replace - disabled.

Number of Pens - set to 1.

Font Options

Use Plotter’s Built-in Font - disabled.

Page 355: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 337

Plotter Font File - Should show the Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory. If nofont file is shown, select Browse to locate the file.

Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the plot.

! Note: This setting overrides the plot font settings specified elsewhere in theprogram.

Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completedplots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots to enablecutting between the plots. (Commonly set to 4”)

Minimal Cut/Plot Line - .008

Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arcto be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may beadjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. For now set at .008

Plotter Page Size

X - The X value should always be set to 46 inches. (Max frame size)

Y - The Y value should always be set to 34.5 inches. (Maximum plot width)

! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter meaning this is the amount ofpaper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time. There is no way toadjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this setting isset to anything else, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not plotat all.

• Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box.

• Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but theplot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not beensetup.

Page 356: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual338

Configuring the output manger

Using the Outman as output manger

• Open the OutMan from the START menu/OptiTex/output control.

• Working Units - From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKINGUNITS. The working units dialog box will be displayed.

• Choose the setting you wish to use.

• Click OK.

• From the OPTIONS menu choose COMMUNICATION. TheCommunication dialog box will be displayed.

Communication

Port Options

Port = Select the COM port you have the plotter connected to.Baud Rate = 9600Data Bits = 8Parity = NoneStop Bits = 1Flow Control = XON/XOFFProtocol = NONE

Paper Size

• Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will be displayed.

• Enter the Width and Length of the paper you are using.

• Click OK.

Page 357: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 339

! Note: If you are using a roll of paper and don’t know the exact length,estimate. The length of the paper needs to be longer than the plot youwish to send.

• Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running.

Configuring Qman

• Open the QMan by double clicking on the icon at START manu/OptiTex 8 / output manger.

Working Units

• From the FILE menu choose WORKING UNITS.

• Select the same setting you selected in the OptiTex plot setup.

OutMan Path Setup

• From the OPTIONS menu choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutManSetup dialog box will be displayed.

• The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be thesame as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:

• Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the listof available drive/directories on the right.

• Click OK.

• Minimize the QMan, keeping it running.

Using the OCC as output manger

• Turn off the computer.

Page 358: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual340

• Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferablyCOM1 or COM2.

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the sametime. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse anddigitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter andmodem.

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

• Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

• Open the OCC program from START menu, OptiTex folder.

• In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

• In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

• Select the “my computer” option. Click NEXT.

• In the “Communication Setting” select the following:

Port = Select the COM port you have the plotter connected to.

Baud Rate = 9600Data Bits = 8Parity = NoneStop Bits = 1Flow Control = XON/XOFFProtocol = NONE

• Click NEXT.

Page 359: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 341

• Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queuefolder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users andcomputers automatically. Using other operation system needs toshare the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

• Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

• Close or minimize the OCC window.

Page 360: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual342

Ioline 28 Plotter

Connecting the plotter

• Turn off the computer.

• Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer.

! Tip: Serial ports are usually identified as COM ports and can be identifiedas COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4.

! Note: Any serial port can be used. However, keep in mind that on manycomputers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ, and COM ports 2and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices youmay need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports. Fordetailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windowsmanuals for your system.

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Install the Ioline software

• Put the Ioline diskette into the floppy drive.

• From the START menu, select RUN.

• Type SETUP: A.

• Select OK or press Enter on the keyboard.

• Follow the on-screen instructions for installation and setup.

Page 361: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 343

! Note: For detailed instructions on installing the Ioline software, refer to theInstallation chapter of the Ioline user’s manual.

Test Plot

Once the Plotter and software have been installed and configured, send a testplot to the plotter. The Ioline Control Center software includes a couple testplot files. The “Send Plot File” command is located in the FILE menu. Forinstructions on sending a test file to the Ioline 28, refer to the Ioline user’smanual.

Calibration Plot

Once a test plot has been successfully plotted indicating that the plotter hasbeen configured properly in the Ioline software, the plot may be calibrated.Calibrating the plot involves plotting a pre-determined size square, measuringthe actual plot and entering the values into the Ioline Calibration program. TheIoline software makes the necessary corrections and sends the settings to theplotter. The CALIBRATE PLOTTER command is located in theCALIBRATE menu. For detailed instructions on running the calibrationprogram, refer to the Ioline user’s manual.

Configuring SGS Programs for the Ioline

Plot Setup

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must a piece in the working area.

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT command. The plot dialog boxwill be displayed.

• Enable the USE OUTPUT MANGER by clicking the box next tothe Use Output Manager option. A small “x” should appear in thebox.

Page 362: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual344

• For OUTMAN users: locate the outman.ini file by selecting theBrowse button. Select the directory that contains the OutMan.inifile.

• Select the Plotter number you want to assign to the HP plotter (i.e.Pltr1, Pltr2, etc.)

• Click OK.

Plot

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The “Plot” dialog box willdisplay.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the workingarea.

Output Manager

Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter.

Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings areoptional. For detailed information on each of these options, refer to thePlotting chapter of the manual, or the plotting tutorial.

Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale.

Options - Set to Plot Continuous.

Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1.

Frame Advance After Last Frame – Checked.

Bulge Corde Error – controls curved lines. The closer the setting to 0, thetruer the curve. However, as this setting gets closer to 0, the pen also moves

Page 363: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 345

slower. A larger number creates a faster, less accurate curve. Use .008 inchesas a starting point and adjust this setting as necessary.

Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.

• Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.The Plot Setting dialog box will display.

Plot Setting

Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of theplotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS softwareinstallation.

Format - Plotter Language. Set to either HPGL or DMPL.

Device Options

(0,0) in Page Center - Should be disabled (unchecked).

Manual Page Replace - Should be disabled (unchecked).

Number of Pens - Set to 1.

Font Options

Use Plotter’s Built-in Font - Should be disabled (unchecked).

Plotter Font File – The Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory should be displayed.If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file (usually located inC:\OptiTex).

Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the headerof the marker.

Page 364: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual346

Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completedplots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots.

Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for Ioline plotters.

Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arcto be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may beadjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. The default is 0.

Plotter Page Size

Y - The Y value is the useable width of the paper (minus margins.) The factorysetting is 72 inches. Adjust this setting according to the paper size you areusing.

X- The X value should always be set to 46 inches or 118 cm.

! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount ofpaper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 46 inches. There is noway to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If thissetting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or notplot at all.

• Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box.

• Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but theplot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not beensetup.

The SGS software has been configured. The next step is to configure theOutMan and the Qman. The OutMan and QMan start automatically when aplot file is sent to the plotter.

Page 365: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 347

Configuring the output manger

Use the Outman as output manger.

• Open the OutMan from the START menu/OptiTex/output control.

Working Units

From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. The workingunits dialog box will display.

• Choose the appropriate setting.

• Click OK.

Communication

• From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. TheCommunication dialog box will display.

Port Options

Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.Baud Rate = 9600Data Bits = 8Parity = NoneStop Bits = 1Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL.

HPGLDTR/DSR = Enabled (checked)RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked)Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked)

DMPL (recommended)

Page 366: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual348

DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked)

RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked)Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked)

Protocol = NONE.

Paper Size

• Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display.

• Enter the Width and Length of the paper.

• Click OK.

! Note: If the exact paper length is unknown, estimate. The length of thepaper needs to be longer than the file that will be plotted.

• Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close OutMan

Configuring Qman

• Open the QMan by clicking on the icon from the output utility subfolder in the START menu / OptiTex folder.

Working Units

• From the FILE menu, choose WORKING UNITS.

• Select the appropriate units. The selection should match theworking units set in the SGS plot dialog box.

Page 367: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 349

OutMan Path Setup

• From the OPTION menu, choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutManSetup dialog box will display.

The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be thesame as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not: Select theOutman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list ofavailable drive/directories on the right.

• Click OK.

• Minimize the QMan keeping it running. Do not close Qman.

Hints

If the plotter does not plot, check the file name length. It should be limited to8 alphanumeric characters.

Using the OCC as output manger

• Turn off the computer.

• Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferablyCOM1 or COM2.

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the sametime. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse anddigitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter andmodem.

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Page 368: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual350

• Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

• Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the STARTmenu.

• In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

• In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

• Select the “my computer” option. Click NEXT.

• In the “Communication Setting” select the following:

Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.Baud Rate = 9600Data Bits = 8Parity = NoneStop Bits = 1Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL.

HPGLDTR/DSR = Enabled (checked)RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked)Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked)

DMPL (recommended)DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked)RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked)Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked)Protocol = NONE.

• Click NEXT.

Page 369: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 351

• Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queuefolder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users andcomputers automatically. Using other operation system needs toshare the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

• Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

• Close or minimize the OCC window.

Page 370: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual352

Ioline 600 Plotter

Connecting the plotter

• Turn off the computer.

• Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer.

! Tip: Serial ports are usually identified as COM ports and can be identifiedas COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4.

! Note: Any serial port can be used. However, keep in mind that on manycomputers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ and COM ports 2and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices youmay need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports. Fordetailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windowsmanuals for your system.

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Install the Ioline software

• Put the Ioline diskette into the floppy drive.

• From the START menu, select RUN.

• Type SETUP: A.

• Select OK or press Enter on the keyboard.

• Follow the on-screen instructions for installation and setup.

Page 371: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 353

! Note: For detailed instructions on installing the Ioline software, refer to theInstallation chapter of the Ioline user’s manual.

Test Plot

Once the Plotter and software have been installed and configured, send a testplot to the plotter. The Ioline Control Center software includes a couple testplot files. The “Send Plot File” command is located in the FILE menu. Forinstructions on sending a test file to the Ioline 600, refer to the Ioline user’smanual.

Calibration Plot

Once a test plot has been successfully plotted indicating that the plotter hasbeen configured properly in the Ioline software, the plot may be calibrated.Calibrating the plot involves plotting a pre-determined size square, measuringthe actual plot and entering the values into the Ioline Calibration program. TheIoline software makes the necessary corrections and sends the settings to theplotter. The CALIBRATE PLOTTER command is located in theCALIBRATE menu. For detailed instructions on running the calibrationprogram, refer to the Ioline user’s manual.

Configuring SGS Programs for the Ioline

Plot Setup

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must a piece in the working area.

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT command. The plot dialog boxwill be displayed.

• Enable the USE OUTPUT MANGER by clicking the box next tothe Use Output Manager option. A small “x” should appear in thebox.

Page 372: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual354

• For OutMan users: locate the outman.ini file by selecting theBrowse button. Select the directory that contains the OutMan.inifile.

• Select the Plotter number you want to assign to the HP plotter (i.e.Pltr1, Pltr2, etc.)

• Click OK.

Plot

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The “Plot” dialog box willdisplay.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the workingarea.

Output Manager

Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter.

Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings areoptional. For detailed information on each of these options, refer to thePlotting chapter of the manual, or the plotting tutorial.

Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale.

Options - Set to Plot Continuous.

Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1.

Frame Advance After Last Frame – Checked.

Bulge Cord Error – controls curved lines. The closer the setting to 0, thetruer the curve. However, as this setting gets closer to 0, the pen also moves

Page 373: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 355

slower. A larger number creates a faster, less accurate curve. Use .008 inchesas a starting point and adjust this setting as necessary.

Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.

• Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.The Plot Setting dialog box will display.

Plot Setting

Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of theplotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS softwareinstallation.

Format - Plotter Language. Set to either HPGL or DMPL.

Device Options

(0,0) in Page Center - Should be disabled (unchecked).

Manual Page Replace - Should be disabled (unchecked).

Number of Pens - Set to 1.

Font Options

Use Plotter’s Built-in Font - Should be disabled (unchecked).

Plotter Font File – The Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory should be displayed.If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file (usually located inC:\OptiTex).

Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the headerof the marker.

Page 374: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual356

Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completedplots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots.

Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for Ioline plotters.

Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arcto be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may beadjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. The default is 0.

Plotter Page Size

Y - The Y value is the useable width of the paper (minus margins.) The factorysetting is 72 inches. Adjust this setting according to the paper size you areusing.

X- The X value should always be set to 46 inches or 118 cm.

! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount ofpaper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 46 inches. There is noway to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If thissetting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or notplot at all.

• Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box.

• Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but theplot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not beensetup.

Page 375: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 357

Configuring the output manger

Using the Outman as output manger.

• Open the OutMan from the START menu/OptiTex/output control.

Working Units

From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. The workingunits dialog box will display.

• Choose the appropriate setting.

• Click OK.

Communication

• From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. TheCommunication dialog box will display.

Port Options

Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.Baud Rate = 9600Data Bits = 8Parity = NoneStop Bits = 1Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL.

HPGLDTR/DSR = Enabled (checked)RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked)Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked)

DMPL (recommended)DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked)

Page 376: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual358

RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked)Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked)

Protocol = NONE.

Paper Size

• Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display.

• Enter the Width and Length of the paper.

• Click OK.

! Note: If the exact paper length is unknown, estimate. The length of thepaper needs to be longer than the file that will be plotted.

• Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close OutMan

Configuring Qman

• Open the QMan by clicking on the icon from the output utility subfolder in the START menu / OptiTex folder/ Output Control

Working Units

• From the FILE menu, choose WORKING UNITS.

• Select the appropriate units. The selection should match theworking units set in the SGS plot dialog box.

OutMan Path Setup

• From the OPTION menu, choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutManSetup dialog box will display.

Page 377: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 359

• The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be thesame as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not: Select theOutman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list of availabledrive/directories on the right.

• Click OK.

• Minimize the QMan keeping it running. Do not close Qman.

Hints

If the plotter does not plot, check the file name length. It should be limited to8 alphanumeric characters.

Using the OCC as output manger

• Turn off the computer.

• Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferablyCOM1 or COM2.

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the sametime. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse anddigitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter andmodem.

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

• Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

• Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the STARTmenu.

• In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

Page 378: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual360

• In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

• Select the “my computer” option. Click NEXT.

• In the “Communication Setting” select the following:

Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.Baud Rate = 9600Data Bits = 8Parity = NoneStop Bits = 1Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL.HPGLDTR/DSR = Enabled (checked)RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked)Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked)

DMPL (recommended)DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked)RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked)Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked)

Protocol = NONE.

• Click NEXT.

• Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queuefolder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

Page 379: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 361

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users andcomputers automatically. Using other operation system needs toshare the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

• Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

• Close or minimize the OCC window.

Page 380: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual362

Ioline Studio Plotter

Connecting the plotter

• Turn off the computer.

• Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer.

! Tip: Serial ports are usually identified as COM ports and can be identifiedas COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4.

! Note: Any serial port can be used. However, keep in mind that on manycomputers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ, and COM ports 2and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices youmay need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports. Fordetailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windowsmanuals for your system.

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Install the Ioline software

• Put the Ioline diskette into the floppy drive.

• From the START menu, select RUN.

• Type SETUP: A.

• Select OK or press Enter on the keyboard.

• Follow the on-screen instructions for installation and setup.

Page 381: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 363

! Note: For detailed instructions on installing the Ioline software, refer to theInstallation chapter of the Ioline user’s manual.

Test Plot

Once the Plotter and software have been installed and configured, send a testplot to the plotter. The Ioline Control Center software includes a couple testplot files. The “Send Plot File” command is located in the FILE menu. Forinstructions on sending a test file to the Ioline 600, refer to the Ioline user’smanual.

Calibration Plot

Once a test plot has been successfully plotted indicating that the plotter hasbeen configured properly in the Ioline software, the plot may be calibrated.Calibrating the plot involves plotting a pre-determined size square, measuringthe actual plot and entering the values into the Ioline Calibration program. TheIoline software makes the necessary corrections and sends the settings to theplotter. The CALIBRATE PLOTTER command is located in theCALIBRATE menu. For detailed instructions on running the calibrationprogram, refer to the Ioline user’s manual.

Configuring SGS Programs for the Ioline

Plot Setup

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must a piece in the working area.

• From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box willdisplay.

• Enable the “Use Output Manager”. A small “x” should appear in thebox.

Page 382: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual364

• For OutMan users: Select the directory that contains the OutMan.ini(usually C:\Optitex) by clicking the Browse. Select the Plotternumber to be assigned to the Ioline.

• Click OK.

Plot

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The “Plot” dialog box willdisplay.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the workingarea.

Output Manager

Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter.

Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings areoptional. For detailed information on each of these options, refer to thePlotting chapter of the manual, or the plotting tutorial.

Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale.

Options - Set to Plot Continuous.

Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1.

Frame Advance After Last Frame – Checked.

Bulge Cord Error – controls curved lines. The closer the setting to 0, thetruer the curve. However, as this setting gets closer to 0, the pen also movesslower. A larger number creates a faster, less accurate curve. Use .008 inchesas a starting point and adjust this setting as necessary.

Page 383: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 365

Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.

• Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.The Plot Setting dialog box will display.

Plot Setting

Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of theplotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS softwareinstallation.

Format - Plotter Language. Set to either HPGL or DMPL.

Device Options

(0,0) In Page Center - Should be disabled (unchecked).

Manual Page Replace - Should be disabled (unchecked).

Number of Pens - Set to 1.

Font Options

Use Plotter’s Built-in Font - Should be disabled (unchecked).

Plotter Font File – The Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory should be displayed.If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file (usually located inC:\OptiTex).

Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the headerof the marker.

Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completedplots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots.

Page 384: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual366

Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for Ioline plotters.

Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arcto be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may beadjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. The default is 0.

Plotter Page Size

Y – The Y value should be 39.5 inches (the maximum plotting & cuttingwidth).

X – The X value should be 46 inches (the plotter frame size).

! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount ofpaper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 46 inches. There is noway to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If thissetting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or notplot at all.

• Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box.

• 4. Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be savedbut the plot will not be sent because the OutMan and Qman werenot set.

Configuring the output manger

Using the OutMan as output manger

• In the START menu, click on the OutMan icon at the OptiTex \OUTPUT CONTROL folder.

• From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. Theworking units dialog box will display.

Page 385: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 367

• Choose the appropriate setting.

• Click OK.

Communication

• From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. TheCommunication dialog box will display.

Port Options

Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.Baud Rate = 9600Data Bits = 8Parity = NoneStop Bits = 1Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL.

HPGLDTR/DSR = Enabled (checked)RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked)Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked)

DMPL (recommended)DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked)RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked)Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked)

Protocol = NONE.

Paper Size

• Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display.

• Enter the Width and Length of the paper.

Page 386: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual368

• Click OK.

! Note: If the exact paper length is unknown, estimate. The length of thepaper needs to be longer than the file that will be plotted.

• Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close OutMan

Configuring Qman

• Open the QMan by clicking on the icon from the Output Controlsub folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder.

Working Units

• From the FILE menu, choose WORKING UNITS.

• Select the appropriate units. The selection should match theworking units set in the SGS plot dialog box.

OutMan Path Setup

• From the OPTION menu, choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutManSetup dialog box will display.

• The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be thesame as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:

• Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the listof available drive/directories on the right.

• Click OK.

• Minimize the Qman keeping it running. Do not close Qman.

Page 387: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 369

Using the OCC as output manger

• Turn off the computer.

• Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferablyCOM1 or COM2.

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the sametime. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse anddigitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter andmodem.

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

• Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

• Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the STARTmenu.

• In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

• In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

• Select the “my computer” option. Click NEXT.

• In the “Communication Setting” select the following:

Port Options

Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.Baud Rate = 9600Data Bits = 8Parity = NoneStop Bits = 1

Page 388: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual370

Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL.

HPGLDTR/DSR = Enabled (checked)RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked)Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked)

DMPL (recommended)DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked)RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked)Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked)

Protocol = NONE.

• Click NEXT.

• Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queuefolder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users andcomputers automatically. Using other operation system needs toshare the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

• Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

Close or minimize the OCC window

Page 389: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 371

Ioline Stylist Plotter

Connecting the plotter

• Turn off the computer.

• Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer.

! Tip: Serial ports are usually identified as COM ports and can be identifiedas COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4.

! Note: Any serial port can be used. However, keep in mind that on manycomputers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ, and COM ports 2and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices youmay need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports. Fordetailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windowsmanuals for your system.

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Configuring SGS Programs for the Ioline

Plot Setup

The Plotter Setup command is used to select the location of the OutMan.iniand the plotter.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must a piece in the working area.

• From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box willdisplay.

• Enable the Use Output Manager. A small “x” should appear in thebox.

Page 390: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual372

• Select the output manger that you using

• For OutMan users: locate the outman.ini file by clicking on thebrowse button and select the Plotter number to be assigned to theIoline.

• Click OK.

Plot

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box willdisplay.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the workingarea.

Output Manager

Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter.

Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings areoptional. For detailed information on each of these options, refer to thePlotting chapter of the manual, or the plotting tutorial.

Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale.

Options - Set to Plot Continuous.

Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1.

Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.

• Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.The Plot Setting dialog box will display.

Page 391: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 373

Plot Setting

Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of theplotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS softwareinstallation.

Format - Plotter Language. Set to DMPL.

Device Options

(0,0) in Page Center - Should be disabled (unchecked).

Manual Page Replace - Should be disabled (unchecked).

Number of Pens - Set to 1.

Font Options

Use Plotter’s Built-in Font - Should be disabled (unchecked).

Plotter Font File - Should show the Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory. If nofont file is shown, select Browse to locate the file.

Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the plot.

! Note: This setting overrides the plot font settings specified elsewhere in theprogram.

Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completedplots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots.

Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for Ioline plotters.

Page 392: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual374

Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arcto be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may beadjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots.

Plotter Page Size

Y - The Y value is the width of the paper. The factory setting is 72 inches.Adjust this setting according to the paper size you are using.

X- The X value should always be set to 36 inches.

! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount ofpaper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 36 inches. There is noway to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If thissetting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or notplot at all.

• Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box.

• Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but theplot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not beensetup.

Configuring the output manger

Using the Outman as output manger

• Open the OutMan by clicking on the icon from the Output Controlsub folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder.

Working Units

• From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. Theworking units dialog box will display.

Page 393: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 375

• Choose the appropriate setting.

• Click OK.

Communication

• From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. TheCommunication dialog box will display.

Port Options

Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.Baud Rate = 9600Data Bits = 8Parity = NoneStop Bits = 1Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL.

DMPLDTR/DSR = disabled (unchecked)RTS/CTS = disabled (unchecked)Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked)

Protocol = NONE.

Paper Size

• Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display.

• Enter the Width and Length of the paper.

Page 394: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual376

Click OK.

! Note: If the exact paper length is unknown, estimate. The length of thepaper needs to be longer than the file that will be plotted.

• Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close OutMan

Configuring Qman

• Open the QMan by clicking on the icon from the Output Controlsub folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder

Working Units

• From the FILE menu, choose WORKING UNITS.

• Select the appropriate units. The selection should match theworking units set in the SGS plot dialog box.

Path Setup

The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the same asspecified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:

• Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the listof available drive/directories on the right.

• Click OK.

• Minimize the QMan keeping it running. Do not close Qman.

Page 395: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 377

Using the OCC as output manger

• Turn off the computer.

• Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferablyCOM1 or COM2.

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the sametime. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse anddigitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter andmodem.

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

• Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

• Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the STARTmenu.

• In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

• In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

• Select the “my computer” option. Click NEXT.

• In the “Communication Setting” select the following:

Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.Baud Rate = 9600Data Bits = 8Parity = NoneStop Bits = 1Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL.

Page 396: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual378

DMPLDTR/DSR = disabled (unchecked)RTS/CTS = disabled (unchecked)Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked)

Protocol = NONE.

• Click NEXT.

• Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queuefolder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users andcomputers automatically. Using other operation system needs toshare the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

• Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

Page 397: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 379

Configuring the Ioline Summit Plotter For Use With SGS Software

Connecting the plotter

• Turn off the computer.

• Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer.

! Tip: Serial ports are usually identified as COM ports and can be identifiedas COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4.

! Note: Any serial port can be used. However, keep in mind that on manycomputers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ and COM ports 2and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices youmay need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports. Fordetailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windowsmanuals for your system.

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Install the Ioline software

• Put the Ioline diskette into the floppy drive.

• From the START menu, select RUN.

• Type SETUP: A.

• Select OK or press Enter on the keyboard.

• Follow the on-screen instructions for installation and setup.

Page 398: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual380

! Note: For detailed instructions on installing the Ioline software, refer tothe Installation chapter of the Ioline user’s manual.

Test Plot

Once the Plotter and software have been installed and configured, send a testplot to the plotter. The Ioline Control Center software includes a couple testplot files. The “Send Plot File” command is located in the FILE menu. Forinstructions on sending a test file to the Summit, refer to the Ioline user’smanual.

Calibration Plot

Once a test plot has been successfully plotted indicating that the plotter hasbeen configured properly in the Ioline software, the plot may be calibrated.Calibrating the plot involves plotting a pre-determined size square, measuringthe actual plot and entering the values into the Ioline Calibration program. TheIoline software makes the necessary corrections and sends the settings to theplotter. The CALIBRATE PLOTTER command is located in theCALIBRATE menu. For detailed instructions on running the calibrationprogram, refer to the Ioline user’s manual.

Configuring SGS Programs for the Ioline

Plot Setup

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must a piece in the working area.

• From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. The “Plot” dialog box willdisplay.

• Select the Output manger to use.

• Enable the Use Output Manager. A small “x” should appear in thebox.

Page 399: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 381

• For OutMan users: If an OutMan.ini location does not appear in thebox, select Browse to locate the outman.ini file. Select the Plotternumber to be assigned to the Ioline.

• Click OK.

Plot

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The “Plot” dialog box willdisplay.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the workingarea.

Output Manager

Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter.

Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings areoptional. For detailed information on each of these options, refer to thePlotting chapter of the manual, or the plotting tutorial.

Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale.

Options - Set to Plot Continuous.

Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1.

Frame Advance After Last Frame – Checked.

Bulge Corde Error – controls curved lines. The closer the setting to 0, thetruer the curve. However, as this setting gets closer to 0, the pen also movesslower. A larger number creates a faster, less accurate curve. Use .008 inchesas a starting point and adjust this setting as necessary.

Page 400: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual382

Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.

• Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.The Plot Setting dialog box will display.

Plot Setting

Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of theplotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS softwareinstallation.

Format - Plotter Language. Set to either HPGL or DMPL.

Device Options

(0,0) In Page Center - Should be disabled (unchecked).

Manual Page Replace - Should be disabled (unchecked).

Number of Pens - Set to 1.

Font Options

Use Plotter’s Built-in Font - Should be disabled (unchecked).

Plotter Font File – The Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory should be displayed.If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file (usually located inC:\OptiTex).

Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the headerof the marker.

Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completedplots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots.

Page 401: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 383

Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for Ioline plotters.

Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arcto be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may beadjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. The default is 0.

Plotter Page Size

Y - The Y value is the useable width of the paper (minus margins.) The factorysetting is 72 inches. Adjust this setting according to the paper size you areusing.

X- The X value should always be set to 46 inches or 118 cm.

! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount ofpaper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 46 inches. There is noway to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If thissetting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or notplot at all.

• Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box.

• Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but theplot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not beensetup.

The SGS software has been configured. The next step is to configure theOutMan and the Qman. The OutMan and QMan start automatically when aplot file is sent to the plotter.

Page 402: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual384

Configuring the output manger.

Using the OutMan as Output manger

• Open the OutMan by clicking on the icon from the Output Controlsub folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder.

Working Units

From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. The workingunits dialog box will display.

• Choose the appropriate setting.

• Click OK.

Communication

• From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. TheCommunication dialog box will display.

Port Options

Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.Baud Rate = 9600Data Bits = 8Parity = NoneStop Bits = 1Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL andDMPL.HPGLDTR/DSR = Enabled (checked)RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked)Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked)

DMPL (recommended)DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked)

Page 403: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 385

RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked)Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked)

Protocol = NONE.

Paper Size

• Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display.

• Enter the Width and Length of the paper.

• Click OK.

! Note: If the exact paper length is unknown, estimate. The length of thepaper needs to be longer than the file that will be plotted.

• Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close OutMan

Configure the Qman

• Open the QMan by clicking on the icon from the Output Controlsub folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder.

Working Units

• From the FILE menu, choose WORKING UNITS.

• Select the appropriate units. The selection should match theworking units set in the SGS plot dialog box.

OutMan Path Setup

• From the OPTION menu, choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutManSetup dialog box will display.

Page 404: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual386

• The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be thesame as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:

• Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the listof available drive/directories on the right.

• Click OK.

• Minimize the QMan keeping it running. Do not close Qman.

Using the OCC as output manger

• Turn off the computer.

• Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferablyCOM1 or COM2.

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the sametime. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse anddigitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter andmodem.

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

• Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

• Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the STARTmenu.

• In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

• In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

• Select the “my computer” option. Click NEXT.

Page 405: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 387

• In the “Communication Setting” select the following:

Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.Baud Rate = 9600Data Bits = 8Parity = NoneStop Bits = 1Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL.

HPGLDTR/DSR = Enabled (checked)RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked)Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked)

DMPL (recommended)DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked)RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked)Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked)

Protocol = NONE.

• Click NEXT.

• Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queuefolder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users andcomputers automatically. Using other operation system needs toshare the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

• Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

Close or minimize the OCC window

Page 406: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual388

Troubleshooting Tips for the Ioline Summit Plotter

Ioline software show’s no plotter:

Cable - make sure it is securely fastened at both ends. If possible try anothercable.

Perform the Serial Test: included with the Ioline Control Center software.For instructions on performing this test refer to the Summit User’s Guide.

Blinking red light on plotter after plot has been sent:

Communication problems: Check the following:

Cable - make sure it is securely fastened at both ends. If possible try anothercable.

Port Configuration - Make sure the port is configured correctly:

Baud rate =9600

Parity =none

Data bits =8

Stop bits =1

Flow control

HPGL = DTR/DSR-enabled

RTS/CTS-enabled

Xon/Xoff- disabled

DMPL = DTR/DSR-disabled

Page 407: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 389

RTS/CTS-disabled

Xon/Xoff- enabled

Port - Have port checked.

Plotter - Run Plotter Port Test, which requires a diagnostic module availablefrom Ioline.

The Ioline plotter won’t plot:

Cable - make sure it is securely fastened at both ends. If possible try anothercable.

OutMan - Make sure it is running, the communication and handshake settingsare correct and the protocol is set to none.

QMan - Make sure it is running. Make sure the OutMan path is specifiedcorrectly.

Ioline is in Stop Mode - Press the Start/Stop key to put the plotter in startmode (green light).

Test plot - Send a test plot from DOS or Ioline Control Panel software. If theplotter doesn’t plot from Ioline software, refer to the troubleshooting guide inthe Ioline user’s manual.

The Ioline Plotter Plots Incorrectly, Doesn’t finish the plot, skips parts ofthe plot or leaves large gaps between frames:

Frame Size - Frame size is set incorrectly. Frame size should be X = 46, Y =width of paper, typically 72”.

Plots “garbage”:

Page 408: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual390

Language - Make sure the correct language is being sent. Language for thisplotter is set to either DMPL or HPGL.

Plots too large/small:

Scale Factor - Make sure the Scale Factor in the Plot dialog box is set to X=1Y=1.

Calibrate - Run the calibration program that comes with the Ioline controlpanel. For instructions on the calibration process refer to the Ioline user’smanual.

Fonts are too small/large in the HEADER of the marker:

• Adjust the font size in the Plot Setting dialog box in the SGSprograms. The plot setting dialog box is accessed by:

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT.

• Select the Setup button on the lower right of the dialog box.

• Enter the desired font size in the Default Font Size box.

• Click OK.

! Note: If you change the font size and the fonts are still plotting incorrectly,delete the Optikad.ini file located in the Windows directory and re-configure plot settings.

Piece Information fonts are too large or too small:

• From the SGS MARK program, select the PIECE pulldown Menu,then select GLOBAL INFO.

Page 409: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 391

• On the right hand side of the Global pieces information dialog box,locate the box called, “Adjust Descriptions.”

• Enter in the desired maximum text size. For example, if the textwas previously too large when set to 1”, change the setting to .5”and click APPLY.

• Create a test plot to make sure the new text size is acceptable. Iffurther changes are necessary, repeat steps 1 - 3.

! Note: This setting adjusts the maximum text size for the standard pieceinformation (or piece descriptions). On larger pieces, the text willplot at the maximum set size. On smaller pieces, text will plot smallerto fit on the piece.

Internal fonts are too large or too small:

• From the SGS MARK program, select the PIECE pull down Menu,then select GLOBAL INFO.

• On the right hand side of the Global pieces information dialog box,locate the box called, “Internal Texts.”

• Enter in the desired minimum and maximum sizes. For example, ifinternal text should only be between .25” and 1”, set this boxaccordingly. Internal text will plot no smaller than .25” and nolarger than 1”.

• Create a test plot to make sure text is acceptable. If further changesare necessary, repeat steps 1 - 3.

! Note: This setting adjusts the text size for internal texts (text added with thetext tool).

Page 410: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual392

Leaves too much or not enough gap between jobs/copies:

Check the Gap after Plotting setting in the Plot Setting dialog box. The PlotSetting dialog box can be accessed by:

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT.

• Select the Setup button on the lower right of the Plot dialog box.

• Enter in a new value in the Gap After Plotting box.

• Click OK.

Pen rips the paper during plot:

Make sure pen is loaded correctly (it must be lined up on the edges of the rollfeeds).

Check the pen force.

Pen may be out of ink.

Pen may be broken.

Paper pressure roller must not be placed over the two connection points of thepaper advance bar.

Plots very Slowly:

Make sure the file format is set up correctly.

For more troubleshooting tips refer to the Ioline user’s guide.

Page 411: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 393

Plotter Technology Plotter

Configuring SGS Programs

Plot Setup

The Plotter Setup command is used to select the location of the OutMan.iniand the plotter.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must a piece in the working area.

• From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. Plot dialog box will display.

• Enable the “Use Output Manager”. A small “x” should appear in thebox.

• For OutMan users: If an OutMan.ini location does not appear in thebox, select Browse and Select the directory that contains theOutMan.ini. Select the Plotter number to be assigned to the PlotterTechnology Neon plotter.

• Click OK.

Plot

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box willdisplay.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the workingarea.

Output Manager

Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter.

Page 412: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual394

Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings areoptional, but are usually checked on. For detailed information on each of theseoptions, refer to the Plotting chapter of the manual, or the plotting tutorial.

Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale.

Options - Set to Plot Continuous.

Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1.

Bulge – Set to .008

Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.

• Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.The Plot Setting dialog box will display.

Plot Setting

Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of theplotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS softwareinstallation.

Format - Plotter Language. Set to HP-GL PlotTec.

Device Options

(0,0) in Page Center - Should be disabled (unchecked).

Manual Page Replace - Should be disabled (unchecked).

Number of Pens - Set to 1.

Page 413: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 395

Font Options

Use Plotter’s Built-in Font - Should be disabled. (Unchecked)

Plotter Font File - Should show the Plot-eng.fnt file. If no font file is shown,select Browse to locate the file.

Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the plot.

! Note: This setting overrides the plot font settings specified elsewhere in theprogram.

Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completedplots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots.

Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for Plotter Technologyplotters.

Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arcto be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may beadjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots.

Plotter Page Size

Y - The Y value is the useable width of the paper (minus margins.) The factorysetting is 72 inches. Adjust this setting according to the paper size you areusing.

X- The X value should always be set to 20 inches for a 36” Neon

The X value should always be set to 30 inches for a 72” Neon

! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount ofpaper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 20 or 30 inches.There is no way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the

Page 414: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual396

plotter. If this setting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plotincorrectly or not plot at all.

• Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box.

• Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but theplot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not beensetup.

The SGS software has been configured. The next step is to configure theOutMan and the Qman. The OutMan and QMan were added to the Startupgroup when SGS software was installed, which means they will startautomatically when Windows is started.

Configuring the output manger

Using the OutMan as output manger

• Open the OutMan by double clicking on the icon at the OUTPUTCONTROL sub directory. It can be found in START > OPTIEX 8>OUTPUT CONTROL

Working Units

From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. The workingunits dialog box will display.

• Choose the appropriate setting.

• Click OK.

Communication

• From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. TheCommunication dialog box will display.

Page 415: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 397

Port Options

Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.Baud Rate = 9600Data Bits = 8Parity = NoneStop Bits = 1Flow = RTS/CTS is checked.

Xon/Xoff is checkedProtocol = None.

Paper Size

• Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display.

• Enter the Width and Length of the paper.

• Click OK.

! Note: If the exact paper length is unknown, estimate. The length of thepaper needs to be longer than the file that will be plotted.

• Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close OutMan

Using the OCC as output manger

• Turn off the computer.

• Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferablyCOM1 or COM2.

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the sametime. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is onCOM4 or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouseand digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotterand modem.

Page 416: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual398

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

• Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

• Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the STARTmenu.

• In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

• In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

• Select the “my computer” option. Click NEXT.

• In the “Communication Setting” select the following:

Port Options

Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.Baud Rate = 9600Data Bits = 8Parity = NoneStop Bits = 1Flow = RTS/CTS is checked.

Xon/Xoff is checkedProtocol = None.

• Click NEXT.

• Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queuefolder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

Page 417: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 399

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users andcomputers automatically. Using other operation system needs toshare the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

• Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

• Close or minimize the OCC window

Hints

Use cardboard for the paper take-up roll – PVC is too heavy.

If using Heat Seal paper, set the plotter speed to low.

When changing to a new roll of Heat Seal paper, swipe the surface that thepaper would touch with a rag lightly dampened with liquid fabric softener.(This reduces the static electricity that the Heat Seal paper generates).

Page 418: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual400

Calcomp TechJet 720 Plotter

Connecting the plotter

• Turn off the computer.

• Connect the plotter to COM1 or COM2 on the computer.

! Note: On many computers, COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ, andCOM ports 2 and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3serial port devices you may need to change the IRQ setting for one ofthe COM ports. For detailed information on IRQ settings refer to theDOS and Windows manuals for the system.

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

! Note: The Calcomp TechJet 720 Plotter must be set up in AutoSence mode.

Configuring output manger

Using the Outman as output manger

• In the START menu, click OptiTex, and OUTMAN.

• From the OPTIONS menu, select WORKING UNITS.

• Choose the appropriate setting. Click OK.

• From the OPTIONS menu, select COMMUNICATION. Set thefollowing port options.

Port - Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.Baud Rate - 9600Data Bits - 8

Page 419: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 401

Parity - NoneStop Bits - 1DTR/DSR - uncheckedRTS/CTS - uncheckedXon/Xoff - checkedProtocol - NONE.

• Click OK.

• Click SET next to Paper on Roll dialog box.

• Enter the Width and Length of the paper. Click OK.

! Note: The length of the paper needs to be longer than the plot you wish tosend.

• Minimize the OutMan. (Do not close OutMan).

Configuring QMan

• In the START menu click OPTITEX 8, and QMan.

• From the OPTIONS menu, choose WORKING UNITS.

• Choose the appropriate setting. Click OK.

• From the OPTIONS menu, select OUTMAN PATH.

• The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be thesame as specified in the Plot Setup.

• Minimize the QMan. (Do not close QMan).

Page 420: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual402

Using the OCC as output manger

• Turn off the computer.

• Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferablyCOM1 or COM2.

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the sametime. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse anddigitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter andmodem.

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

• Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

• Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the STARTmenu.

• In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

• In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

• Select the “my computer” option. Click NEXT.

• In the “Communication Setting” select the following:

Port - Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.Baud Rate - 9600Data Bits - 8Parity - NoneStop Bits - 1DTR/DSR - unchecked

Page 421: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 403

RTS/CTS - uncheckedXon/Xoff - checkedProtocol - NONE.

• Click NEXT.

• Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queuefolder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users andcomputers automatically. Using other operation system needs toshare the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

• Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

• Close or minimize the OCC window

Configuring SGS Software

Plot Setup

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the workingarea.

• From the FILE menu, select the PLOT command.

• Click Use Output Manager field. Select the output manger that youusing.

• For Outman users: Select the directory that contains the OutMan.ini

• Select the Plotter number to be assigned to the Calcomp TechJet720.

Page 422: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual404

• Click OK.

Plot dialog box

• From the FILE menu, select PLOT.

• In the PLOT dialog box, select following boxes:

Use – checked

Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, copies - optional.

Options - Set to Plot Continuous.

Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1.

Plotter Setting -Shows the Plotter language, Length and Width of page size.

! Note: Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.The Plot Setting dialog box is displayed.

Plotter Setup dialog box

Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2

Format – HPGL

(0,0) in Page Center – unchecked

Manual Page Replace – checked

Use CR/LF in code – checked

Use M70 – unchecked

Use bitefeed offset – unchecked

Page 423: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 405

Gap After Plotting - amount of space left between plots.

Minimal Cut/Plot Line – 0

Use Plotter’s Built-in Font – checked

Plotter Font File - eng.fnt file and it’s directory. If no font file is shown,select Browse to locate the file.

Default Font Size - size of the text to the plot.

Number of Pen – 0

Min. Plot Spline Segment - .008

Plotter Page Size - X- 48 inches, Y-34.8 or width of paper.

• Click OK to exit the PLOTTER SETUP dialog box.

• Click OK to exit the PLOT dialog box.

! Note: The Calcomp TechJet 720 plotter model 5436R does notautomatically advance the paper after each frame. The user mustselect CONTINUE at the plotter after each frame. A one-inch gap isplaced between each frame (paper advance).

! Note: Calcomp’s technical support number is 1-800-458-5888.

! Note: The Calcomp 907/PCI Vector mode driver sometimes works in theSGS OptiMark

Page 424: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual406

Gerber AP300 and AP310 Plotters

! Note: It is not necessary to install any Gerber Software

Configuring the output manger

Using the Outman as output manger

• Turn off the computer.

• Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferablyCOM1 or COM2.

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the sametime. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse anddigitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter andmodem.

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

• Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

• Open the Outman and in the OPTIONS Menu, select the desiredWORKING UNITS.

• In the OPTIONS Menu, select COMMUNICATION.

• In the Communication Dialog Box select the following:

Port : the port to which the plotter is connectedBaud Rate : 9600Data Bits :8Parity : None

Page 425: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 407

Stop Bits : 1Flow Control : turn all of these options OFF (no check marks)Communication Protocol : Gerber

• Minimize the Outman. (Do not close Outman.)

Configuring the Qman

• Open the Qman and from the OPTIONS Menu, select the desiredWORKING UNITS.

• In the OPTIONS Menu, select OUTMAN SETUP.

• In the OUTMAN SETUP dialog box, select Outman.ini located inthe directory where the SGS software was loaded. (The defaultdirectory is C:\Optitex)

• Select PLTR1 in the Plotter Name area. (If you have more than oneplotter, select the desired plotter number)

• Minimize the Qman. (Do not close Qman)

Using the OCC as output manger

• Turn off the computer.

• Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferablyCOM1 or COM2.

Page 426: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual408

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the sametime. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse anddigitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter andmodem.

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

• Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

• Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the STARTmenu.

• In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

• In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

• Select the “my computer” option. Click NEXT.

• In the “Communication Setting” select the following:

Port : the port to which the plotter is connectedBaud Rate : 9600Data Bits :8Parity : NoneStop Bits : 1Flow Control : turn all of these options OFF (no check marks)Communication Protocol: Gerber

• Click NEXT.

• Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queuefolder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

Page 427: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 409

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users andcomputers automatically. Using other operation system needs toshare the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

• Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

• Close or minimize the OCC window.

Configuring the Plotter in SGS Software

Once the plotter is configured and the serial port communications have beenadjusted, SGS software is configured to use the plotter.

• Start the SGS PDS or MARK software.

• From the FILE menu, select PLOTT.

• Check the Use Output Manager field.

• Select the output manger that you using.

• For Outman users: Put the correct Outman.ini Path and plotternumber in the OUTMAN MANAGER field. Select OK.

• Display a pattern piece on the screen.

• From the FILE menu, select PLOT. In the PLOTTER/CUTTERsection of the PLOT dialog box, select SETUP.

• In the DRIVER FORMAT field of the PLOT SETTING dialogbox, select AP-GL Gerber Plotter. In Plotter Page Size, the X mustbe 16.25 (the frame size) and the Y must be the width of the paper.(72 inches is the maximum)

• Select OK in the PLOT SETTINGS dialog box.

Page 428: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual410

• The following settings should be checked:

Output Manager- UseAlert on StartRemove on EndAlert on End

• Select OK in the PLOT dialog box.

Troubleshooting

If nothing happens

If you get an error message at the plotter display

If the plotter does not move

It is probably a communication problem. Recheck your hardwarecommunication, recheck the setup of the parameters in the output manager, ortry replacing the plotter cable.

If the plotter reacts (something moves) but not correctly

Recheck the format setup and the frame dimensions. Try to plot a smallermarker with only one piece that is smaller than one frame.

Tips

The plotter side of the communication cable is a 9 pin female adapter. Thecomputer side of the cable is a 25 pin female adapter, Gerber part number055409000 Rev.-A. A 25 to 9 pin adapter may be necessary in order to attachthe cable to the computer.

Page 429: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 411

Gerber AP700 Plotter

! Note: It is not necessary to install any Gerber Software

Configuring the output manger

Using the Outman as output manger

• Turn off the computer.

• Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferablyCOM1 or COM2.

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the sametime. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse anddigitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter andmodem.

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

• Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

Power on- Big red button to the right.Press ENTERS to enable (dot with a circle around it)Initialize F2 (goes to origin)F1 (goes on-line)

• Open the Outman and in the OPTIONS Menu, select the desiredWORKING UNITS.

• In the OPTIONS Menu, select COMMUNICATION.

• In the Communication Dialog Box select the following:

Page 430: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual412

Port - the port to which the plotter is connectedBaud Rate - 9600Data Bits - 8Parity - NoneStop Bits - 1Flow Control turn all of these options OFF (no check marks)Communicate Protocol: Gerber

• Minimize the Outman. (Do not close Outman).

Configuring the Qman

• Open the Qman and in the OPTIONS Menu, select the desiredWORKING UNITS.

• In the OPTIONS Menu, select OUTMAN PATH SETUP.

• In the OUTMAN SETUP dialog box, select Outman.ini located inthe directory where the SGS software was loaded. (The defaultdirectory is C:\Optitex)

• Select PLTR1 in the Plotter Name area. (If you have more than oneplotter, select the desired plotter number)

• Minimize the Qman. (Do not close Qman)

Using the OCC as output manger

• Turn off the computer.

• Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferablyCOM1 or COM2.

Page 431: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 413

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the sametime. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse anddigitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter andmodem.

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

• Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

• Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the STARTmenu.

• In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

• In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

• Select the “my computer” option. Click NEXT.

• In the “Communication Setting” select the following:

Port - the port to which the plotter is connectedBaud Rate - 9600Data Bits - 8Parity - NoneStop Bits - 1Flow Control turn all of these options OFF (no check marks)Communication Protocol: Gerber

• Click NEXT.

• Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queuefolder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

Page 432: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual414

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users andcomputers automatically. Using other operation system needs toshare the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

• Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

• Close or minimize the OCC window.

Configuring the Plotter in SGS Software

Once the plotter is configured and the serial port communications have beenadjusted, SGS software is configured to use the plotter.

• Start the SGS PDS or MARK software.

• From the FILE menu, select PLOT command

• Check the Use Output Manager field.

• Select the output manger that you using.

• For Outman users: Put the correct Outman.ini Path and plotternumber in the OUTMAN MANAGER field. Select OK.

• Display a pattern piece on the screen.

• From the FILE menu, select PLOT. In the PLOTTER/CUTTERsection of the PLOT dialog box, select SETUP.

• In the DRIVER FORMAT field of the PLOT SETTING dialog box,select AP-GL Gerber Plotter. In Plotter Page Size, the X must be16.25 (the frame size) and the Y must be the width of the paper. (72inches is the maximum)

• Select OK in the PLOT SETTINGS dialog box.

Page 433: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 415

• The following settings should be checked:

Output Manager- UseAlert on StartRemove on EndAlert on End

• Select OK in the PLOT dialog box.

Troubleshooting

If nothing happens

If you get an error message at the plotter display

If the plotter does not move

It is probably a communication problem. Recheck your hardwarecommunication, recheck the setup of the parameters in the output manager, ortry replacing the plotter cable.

If the plotter reacts (something moves) but not correctly

Recheck the format setup and the frame dimensions. Try to plot a smallermarker with only one piece that is smaller than one frame.

Tips

The AP700 has the serial port on the INSIDE of the plotter. It is necessary toremove some screws in order to find the port.

The AP700 plotter cable is a 25 pin female on computer side and 25 pin onplotter side, Gerber part number 050225-002, E dated 11-89 DSC. A 25 to 9pin adapter may be necessary in order to attach the cable to the computer.

Page 434: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual416

NovaJet Plotter

Connecting the plotter

• Turn off the computer.

• Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer.

! Tip: Serial ports are usually identified as COM ports and can be identifiedas COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4.

! Note: Any serial port can be used. However, keep in mind that on manycomputers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ and COM ports 2and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices youmay need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports. Fordetailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windowsmanuals for your system.

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Configuring SGS Programs for the NovaJet

Plot Setup

The Plotter Setup command is used to select the location of the OutMan.iniand the plotter.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must a piece in the working area.

• From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box willdisplay.

• Enable the “Use Output Manager” A small “x” should appear in thebox.

Page 435: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 417

• For OutMan users: If an OutMan.ini location does not appear in thebox, select Browse and Select the directory that contains theOutMan.ini. Select the Plotter number assigned to the NovaJet

• Click OK.

Plot

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box willdisplay.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the workingarea.

Output Manager

Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter.

Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings areoptional. For detailed information on each of these options, refer to thePlotting chapter of the manual, or the plotting tutorial.

Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale.

Options - Set to Plot Continuous.

Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1.

Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.

• Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.The Plot Setting dialog box will display.

Page 436: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual418

Plot Setting

Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of theplotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS softwareinstallation.

Format - Plotter Language. Set to HPGL

Device Options

(0,0) in Page Center - Should be disabled (unchecked).

Manual Page Replace - Should be disabled (unchecked).

Number of Pens - Set to 1.

Font Options

Use Plotter’s Built-in Font - Should be enabled (checked).

Plotter Font File - Should be grayed out if using plotter’s built in font. If notusing the plotter’s built in font , the Plot-eng.fnt file and it’s directory shouldbe displayed. If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file.

Default Font Size - This setting determines the default size of the text on theplot.

! Note: This setting overrides the plot font settings specified elsewhere in theprogram.

Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completedplots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots.

Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for Ioline plotters.

Page 437: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 419

Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arcto be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may beadjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots.

Plotter Page Size

Y - The Y value is the useable width of the paper (minus margins.) The factorysetting is 72 inches. Adjust this setting according to the paper size you areusing.

X- The X value should always be set to 35.6”.

*See your NovaJet manual for frame size. The size varies depending on themodel of the NovaJet.

! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount ofpaper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 35.6 inches. There isno way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If thissetting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or notplot at all.

• Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box.

• Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but theplot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not beensetup.

Configuring the output manger

Using the OutMan as output manger.

• Open the OutMan by clicking on the OutMan icon in the STARTmenu. The icon can be found in the OUTPUT CONTROL folder atOptiTex 8 menu.

Page 438: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual420

Working Units

From the OPTIONS menu, choose WORKING UNITS. The workingunits dialog box will display.

• Choose the appropriate setting.

• Click OK.

Communication

• From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. TheCommunication dialog box will display.

Port Options

Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.Baud Rate = 9600Data Bits = 8Parity = NoneStop Bits = 1Flow = HPGL

HPGLDTR/DSR = Enabled (checked)RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked)Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked)Protocol = NONE.

Paper Size

• Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display.

• Enter the Width and Length of the paper.

• Click OK.

Page 439: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 421

! Note: If the exact paper length is unknown, estimate. The length of thepaper needs to be longer than the file that will be plotted.

• Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close OutMan

Configuring Qman

• Click on START > Optitex 8 > OUTPUT CONTROL > QMAN

Working Units

• From the FILE menu, choose WORKING UNITS.

• Select the appropriate units. The selection should match theworking units set in the SGS plot dialog box.

• From the FILE menu, choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutMan Setupdialog box will display.

Path Setup

The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the sameas specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:

• Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the listof available drive/directories on the right.

• Click OK.

• Minimize the QMan keeping it running. Do not close Qman.

Page 440: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual422

Using the OCC as output manger

• Turn off the computer.

• Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferablyCOM1 or COM2.

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the sametime. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse anddigitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter andmodem.

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

• Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

• Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the STARTmenu.

• In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

• In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

• Select the “my computer” option. Click NEXT.

• In the “Communication Setting” select the following:

Port Options

Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.Baud Rate = 9600Data Bits = 8Parity = NoneStop Bits = 1

Page 441: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 423

Flow = HPGL

HPGLDTR/DSR = Enabled (checked)RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked)Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked)

Protocol = NONE.

• Click NEXT.

• Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queuefolder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users andcomputers automatically. Using other operation system needs toshare the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

• Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

• Close or minimize the OCC window

Page 442: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual424

Numonics Design Partner 9000 Plotter

Connecting the plotter

• Turn your computer off.

• Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer.

! Tip: Serial ports are usually identified as COM ports and can be identifiedas COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4.

! Note: Any serial port can be used however, keep in mind that on manycomputers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ, and COM ports 2and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices youmay need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports. Fordetailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windowsmanuals for your system.

• Turn the computer on.

• Turn the plotter on.

Configuring the SGS progrem

Plot Setup

! Note: To access the Plot command you must have something in the workingarea.

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot Select dialog box willbe displayed.

Page 443: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 425

• Enable the “Use Output Manager”. A checkmark will be placed inthe box.

• For OutMan users: If an OutMan.ini location does not appear in thebox select Browse and Select the directory that contains theOutMan.ini. .assign the plotter number.

• Click OK.

Plot

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will bedisplayed.

! Note: To access the Plot command you must have something in the workingarea.

Output Manager

Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter.

Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings areoptional. For detailed information on each of these options refer to the Plottingchapter of the user’s guide, or the plotting tutorial.

Page Format - Page format should be set to Fixed Scale.

Scale Factor - Should be set to X=1 Y=1.

Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.

• Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.The Plot Setting dialog box will be displayed.

Page 444: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual426

Plot Setting

Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of Pltrlisting depends on how many plotters you specified during softwareinstallation.

Format - Plotter Language. Should be set to Design Partner

Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completedplots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots to enablecutting between the plots.

Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for the Ioline plotters.

Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arcto be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may beadjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots.

Plotter Page Size

X - The X value should be the frame size.

Y - The Y value is the useable width of the paper (minus margins.) The factorysetting is 72 inches, you will need to adjust according to the paper size you areusing.

! Note: The Frame Size of the plotter meaning this is the amount of paper theplotter feeds and tracks at a time. There is no way to adjust the framesize in the software or on the plotter. If this setting is set to anythingelse the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not plot at all.

• Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box.

Page 445: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 427

• Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but theplot will not be sent because the OutMan and QueMan have notbeen setup.

Configuring the output manger

Using the OutMan as output manger

• Click on the OutMan icon at the START menu. It can be found atSTART > OptiTex 8 >OUTPUT CONTROL

Working Units

• From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. Theworking units dialog box will be displayed.

• Choose the setting you wish to use.

• Click OK.

Communication

• From the OPTIONS menu choose COMMUNICATION. TheCommunication dialog box will be displayed.

Port Options

Port = Select the COM port you have the plotter connected to.Baud Rate = 9600Data Bits = 8Parity = NoneStop Bits = 1Flow =DTR/DSR = Not enabled (no check in the box)RTS/CTS = Enabled (check in box.)Xon/Xoff = Not enabled (no check in the box)

Page 446: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual428

Paper Size

• Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will be displayed.

• Enter the Width and Length of the paper you are using.

• Click OK.

! Note: If you are using a roll of paper and don’t know the exact length,estimate. The length of the paper needs to be longer than the plot youwish to send.

• Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running.

Configuring QueMan

• Click on the Qman icon in the START menu. It can be found atSTART> OptiTex 8> OUTPUT CONTROL > QMAN

Working Units

• From the FILE menu choose WORKING UNITS.

• Select the same setting you selected in the OptiTex plot setup.

OutMan Path Setup

• From the OPTION menu choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutManSetup dialog box will be displayed.

The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the sameas specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:

• Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the listof available drive/directories on the right.

Page 447: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 429

• Click OK

• Minimize the QueMan keeping it running.

Using the OCC as output manger

• Turn off the computer.

• Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferablyCOM1 or COM2.

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the sametime. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse anddigitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter andmodem.

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

• Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

• Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the STARTmenu.

• In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

• In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

• Select the “my computer” option. Click NEXT.

• In the “Communication Setting” select the following:

Port Options

Port = Select the COM port you have the plotter connected to.

Page 448: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual430

Baud Rate = 9600Data Bits = 8Parity = NoneStop Bits = 1Flow =DTR/DSR = Not enabled (no check in the box)RTS/CTS = Enabled (check in box.)Xon/Xoff = Not enabled (no check in the box)

• Click NEXT.

• Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queuefolder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users andcomputers automatically. Using other operation system needs toshare the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

• Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

Page 449: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 431

Summagraphic HighPlot 7100/7200 Plotter

Connecting the plotter

• Turn your computer off.

• Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer.

! Tip: Serial ports are usually identified as COM ports and can be identifiedas COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4.

! Note: Any serial port can be used however, keep in mind that on manycomputers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ, and COM ports 2and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices youmay need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports. Fordetailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windowsmanuals for your system.

• Turn the computer on.

• Turn the plotter on.

Configuring the SGS programs.

Plot Setup

The Plotter Setup command is used to select the location of the OutMan.iniand the plotter you want to use.

! Note: To access the Plot command you must have something in the workingarea.

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will bedisplayed.

Page 450: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual432

• Enable the Use Output Manager. A checkmark will be placed in thebox.

• For OutMan users: If an OutMan.ini location does not appear in thebox select Browse and locate the directory that contains theOutMan.ini Select the Pltr. number you want to assign to the Ioline.

• Click OK.

Plot

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will bedisplayed.

! Note: To access the Plot command you must have something in the workingarea.

Output Manager

Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter.

Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings areoptional. For detailed information on each of these options refer to the Plottingchapter of the user’s guide, or the plotting tutorial.

Page Format - Page format should be set to Fixed Scale.

Options - Should be set to Plot Continuous.

Scale Factor - Should be set to X=1 Y=1.

Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.

• Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.The Plot Setting dialog box will be displayed.

Page 451: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 433

Plot Setting

Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of Pltrlisting depends on how many plotters you specified during softwareinstallation.

Format - Plotter Language. Should be set to DMPL, HPGL/2 or HPGLGeneric. DMPL is recommended.

Font Options

Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completedplots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots to enablecutting between the plots.

Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for the Ioline plotters.

Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arcto be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may beadjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots.

Plotter Page Size

X - The X value should always be set to the plotter frame size.

Y - The Y value is the useable width of the paper (minus margins.) The factorysetting is 72 inches, you will need to adjust according to the paper size you areusing.

! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter meaning this is the amount ofpaper the plotter feeds and tracks at a time. There is no way to adjustthe frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this setting is set toanything else the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not plot at all.

• Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box.

Page 452: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual434

• Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but theplot will not be sent because the OutMan and QueMan have notbeen setup.

Configuring the output manger

Using the OutMan as output manger

• Open the OutMan by double clicking on the icon at the STARTmenu. It can be found at START> OPTIETX 8> OUTPUTCONTROL> OUTMAN.

Working Units

• From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. Theworking units dialog box will be displayed.

• Choose the setting you wish to use.

• Click OK.

Communication

• From the OPTIONS menu choose COMMUNICATION. TheCommunication dialog box will be displayed.

Port Options

Port = Select the COM port you have the plotter connected to.Baud Rate = 9600Data Bits = 8Parity = NoneStop Bits = 1

Paper Size

• Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will be displayed.

Page 453: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 435

• Enter the Width and Length of the paper you are using.

• Click OK.

! Note: If you are using a roll of paper and don’t know the exact length,estimate. The length of the paper needs to be longer than the plot youwish to send.

• Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running.

Configuring the Qman

• Open the QueMan by double clicking on the icon at the STARTmenu. It can be found at START>OPTITEX 8> OUTPUTCONTROL> QMAN

Working Units

• From the FILE menu choose WORKING UNITS.

• Select the same setting you selected in the OptiTex plot setup.

OutMan Path Setup

• From the FILE menu choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutMan Setupdialog box will be displayed.

The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the sameas specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:

• Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the listof available drive/directories on the right.

• Click OK

Page 454: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual436

Using the OCC as output manger

• Turn off the computer.

• Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferablyCOM1 or COM2.

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the sametime. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse anddigitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter andmodem.

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

• Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

• Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the STARTmenu.

• In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

• In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

• Select the “my computer” option. Click NEXT.

• In the “Communication Setting” select the following:

Port Options

Port = Select the COM port you have the plotter connected to.Baud Rate = 9600Data Bits = 8Parity = NoneStop Bits = 1

Page 455: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 437

• Click NEXT.

• Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queuefolder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users andcomputers automatically. Using other operation system needs toshare the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

• Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

Close or minimize the OCC window

Page 456: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual438

Lectra plotter

Connecting Lectra Plotter to your Computer

In order to connect "Lectra" plotter to your computer you need to have aspecial cross 25 pins serial cable.

This is the serial cable schema:

"Lectra" Plotter pins number: You Computer pins number:

"Lectra" Plotter is using only 4 pins on the 25 pins serial cable.

Pin number 1 in Lectra go to pin number 1 on your computer.

Pin number 2 in Lectra go to pin number 2 on your computer.

Pin number 3 in Lectra go to pin number 3 on your computer.

Pin number 7 in Lectra go to pin number 5 on your computer.

! Note: Lectra pin number 7 is a ground, on a new PC computer pin number8 can be the ground connection! This means that to need connectLectra pin number 7 to pin number 8 on the PC!!

In order to drive "Lectra" plotter you need create this kind of 25 pins serialcable!!

Page 457: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 439

Where to connect your serial cable in "Lectra" plotter:"Lectra" plotter module E32 or E33 has 7 serial COM output connects. One ofthose 7 output connectors goes in to "Lectra" terminal. The terminalconnection is a flat serial cable with only 4 pins, you need to disconnect thisterminal cable and connect the terminal connection directly to you computer.Don't put your cable in the terminal connections on the plotter, connect theterminal to your computer directly with your special crossed serial cable. Nowyou can plot to your "Lectra" plotter.

In order to initialize the plotter you don't need "Lectra" terminal (you can use"Lectra" terminal if you want to calibrate your plotter). OptiTexcommunication driver will initialize the plotter and set the pen position topoint 0.0!

Warnings:

• The default frame size is Y- 180 and X- 35. The frame size canchange (in case you are driving Lectra E-32 machine) from OptiTexplot dialog box.

• The emergency stop button on the plotter is not supported. Onceyou stopped the plotting. With the stop button, you have to re-sendthe whole file again.

• The Lectra Terminal is disabled once you use OptiTex.

• OptiTex Lectra driver will initialize automatically before starting toplot.

How to Create Lectra Plot file in OptiTex version 8:

• After you finish nesting your pieces and you're ready to plot, go toPlot dialog box.

Page 458: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual440

• Check and enable "Use Output manager" option, select "OCC"("output manager service") section and press the Setup button.

• "Plotter Setup" dialog will be appearing.Note: if you are working with Win98 or Win95 you will need toinstall OptiTex and reboot the computer in order to replacemsvcrt.dll and msvcp60.dll in your Windows system folder.Without replacing these *.DLL the "Plotter Setup" dialog will work!

• Press the "Add" button to create a new plotter name and plotterqueue.

• To select a computer: select network or local computer (in order toselect a network computer you need to have a network computerthat already has a shared plotter queue) and then press "Next".

! Note: The enclosed explanation describes a local computer selection track.

• In the next dialog "Communication Setting" select "Lectra protocol"and the relevant COM port, DO NOT change any otherscommunication parameters and press the "next" button.

• The next dialog is a "Local Plotter Setting". In the plotter nameDialog box, write your plotter name. You can use any name but wesuggest using "Lectra".(Don’t change the queue path for sharing, if your operating systemis not NT, you will need to define the share queue folder manually,if you want other computers on the network to be able to plot toyour plotter.)Press "finish" button.

• Now you're back to the main "Plotter Setup" dialog window. Selectyour new plotter (Lectra) and press on "default button.

Page 459: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 441

• Close "Plotter Setup" dialog with "Close" button.

• If the plotter queue that you've just created is new, the"Plotter/Cutter Setup" dialog will open automatically. Select fromthe driver format "Lectra Flat Bed Plotter" driver. Don't change theplotter page size! It's recommended to use OptiTex font and not thePlotter font (don't use "use build - in font" option).

• Confirm your setting with Ok button. Now you're in "Plot" dialogbox and here you will see "Alert on start" option. If this option ischecked, the job that you are sending to the plotter is in "Hold"attribute on the “OCC ".

• Confirm your settings and send the job to the plotter by pressing theOk button.Now the “OCC “will open. How to use “OCC "(Output ControlCenter):The " OCC " is the OptiTex new output system and in order to drive"Lectra" plotter you need to work with the "OCC". The new “OCC" supports "Lectra" communication driver.

• When the "OCC " is loaded (after you press the "plot" dialog box"ok" button), you will see your plotter name in the "OCC" left sideunder "All queues" header and your current job (the plotting data)will be in the "OCC" right side under "Jobs".

• If you job status is hold (remember "Alert on start" option in "Plot"dialog is checked) then in order to send the job to the plotter, presson the "green flag" icon on the tool bar and your job will be send tothe plotter.

• In order to "re-send" a job you can go to "Done" under the queuename on the “OCC " left side, select the job and press the "restart"

Page 460: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual442

button on " OCC " tool bar. You can also delete a job, stop a job andsort jobs.

Page 461: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 443

Configuring the Cutting Edge Cutter

Connect the cutter

The cutter must be assembled and installed.

Install the Cutting Edge Software

Cutting Edge uses the Base module software to drive the cutter.

Configuring the SGS Grade, SGS PDS, or SGS Mark software

• From the FILE menu, choose PLOT.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the workingarea.

• In the PLOT dialog box, select following boxes:

Use – checked

Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies - optional.

Options -Set to Plot Continuous.

Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1.

Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language, Length and Width of page size.

! Note: Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.The Plot Setting dialog box will display.

Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc.

Format - Cutting Edge

Page 462: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual444

(0,0) In Page Center – unchecked

Manual Page Replace – checked

Use CR/LF in code – checked

Use M70 – unchecked

Use bitefeed offset – unchecked

Gap After Plotting - amount of space left between plots.

Minimal Cut/Plot Line - 0

Plotter Font File - eng.fnt file and it’s directory. If no font file is shown,select Browse to locate the file.

Default Font Size - size of the text to the plot.

Number of Pen – 0

Min. Plot Spline Segment = .008

Plotter Page Size = X- longer than maximum marker

Y- useable width of paper minus margins

! Note: “Page Size” is the terminology generally used for plotters. However,in the case of cutters, page size refers to the dimensions of the areathat the cutter cuts. If the Page Size setting is smaller than the markersize when creating an NC file, the file will be blank.

• Click OK to exit the PLOTTER SETUP dialog box.

• Click OK to exit the PLOT dialog box.

Page 463: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 445

Tips

Buttons with drill attributes work best when exporting to a Cutting Edgecutter.

Using an AUX Drill attribute on buttons will execute a CUT command at thecutter.

Using a Drill attribute on buttons will execute a DRILL command at the cutter.

Using a Cut attribute on buttons will execute a DRILL command at the cutter.

Using a Draw attribute on buttons will execute an INK command at the cutter.

I notches with cut attributes work best when exporting to a Cutting Edgecutter.

T notches will draw as I notches at the cutter.

U, V, L, and box notches will cut the same shape at the cutter.

Operational Stops insert an M01 command at the cutter that causes the cutterto pause before or after execution.

Darts will display as INK commands. The way that darts are displayed in theSGS software determines how darts are displayed at the cutting edge machine.

When requesting the .NC file from the Mark software, Axis lines (pleats)display as solid INK lines. When requesting the .NC file from the PDSsoftware, Axis lines (pleats) display as INK notches at the beginning and endof the line.

Internal lines display as INK or CUT lines depending on how the lineattributes are set in the SGS software.

Page 464: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual446

Piece Descriptions and internal text display as ANNOTATION at the CuttingEdge machine.

If the Base line is displayed in the SGS software, the baseline will display asan INK command at the cutting edge machine.

Page 465: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 447

Eastman Cutter

There are several steps to follow when using the Eastman Cutter with the SGSsoftware:

• Installing the Eastman EasyCut program;

• Creating a .GBR file from Scanvec software;

• Importing the SGS .GBR file into Eastman software and cutting thefile.

This document provides information for step 2 above. For steps 1 and 3, pleaserefer to Eastman documentation.

Configuring SGS software

This document gives basic settings and configuration instructions used forEastman cutters.

Plot

• From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box willdisplay.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece or a marker in theworking area.

File Name - Type in the name and path of the file. For example, if the file is tobe sent to a floppy diskette, type: A:\filename

If the file is to be sent to a directory on the C drive, type:C:\directoryname\filename

Page 466: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual448

Output Manager - Use Output Manager, Alert on Start, Alert on End,Remove on End -Disable all of these options.

Page Format

Single and Multiple- Disable (uncheck).

Fixed Scale - Enable (checked).

Options

Plot Continuous - Enable (checked).

Scale Factor

X=1 Y=1

Check Intersections, Order by Tools, and One Page -Disable all of theseoptions.

Bulge - Set at .008

Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.

• Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.The Plot Setting dialog box will display.

Plot Setting

Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of theplotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS softwareinstallation.

Format - Plotter Language should be set to Eastman Cutter.

Page 467: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 449

Device Options

(0,0) In Page Center - Disable (unchecked).

Number of Pens -Set at 0.

Manual Page Replace - Disable (unchecked).

Use CR/LF in code -Enable (checked)

Use M70 - Disable (unchecked).

Use bite feed offset - Disable (unchecked).

Font Options

Use Plotter’s Built-in Font -Enable (checked)

Plotter Font File - Should show the Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory. If nofont file is shown, select Browse to locate the file.

Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the plot.

! Note: This setting overrides the plot font settings specified elsewhere in theprogram.

Gap After Plotting - Set at 0.

Minimal Cut/Plot Line - Set at 0.

Min. Plot Spline Segment- This setting determines the smallest spline or arcto be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may beadjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots.

Page 468: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual450

Plotter Page Size

X =128 The X value represents the frame size or table length.

Y = 43.5 The Y value represents the width of the material.

! Note: Be sure to set this setting correctly. If is set incorrectly, the cutter willnot cut or will cut incorrectly.

• Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box.

• Click OK in the Plot dialog box.

A .GBR file has now been generated and should be located under the path andfile name that was entered at the beginning of this section under “File Name.”

Tips

1/4 inch T notches with a cut and no stop attribute cut best at the Eastmancutter.

Buttons with a Drill M43 attribute cut best at the cutter.

Page 469: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 451

Configuring the Gerber Cutter S3250

Connect the cutter

The cutter must be assembled and installed.

Install the Gerber Software

Gerber uses the Power Processor software to drive the cutter.

Configuring the SGS software

• From the FILE menu, choose PLOT.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the workingarea.

• In the PLOT dialog box, select following boxes:

(Use = checked)

Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies = optional

Page Format = fixed scale

Options = Set to Plot Continuous.

Scale Factor = Set to X=1 Y=1

Whole pieces in frame only

Check intersections before plotting

Optimize Plot/Cut Order

Page 470: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual452

Plotter Setting = Shows the Plotter language, Length and Width of page size.

! Note: Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.The Plot Setting dialog box will display.

Name = Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc.

Format = Gerber Cutter

(0,0) in Page Center = unchecked

Manual Page Replace = unchecked

Use CR/LF in code = unchecked

*Use initialization in file header (M70…) = checked

Use Bitefeed Offset = unchecked (if using Version 7.x. If using a lowerversion: *Use bitefeed offset = checked, -.50)

Gap After Plotting = amount of space left between plots.

Minimal Cut/Plot Line = 0

Use Plotter’s Built-in Font = unchecked

Plotter Font File = eng.fnt file and it’s directory. If no font file is shown,select Browse to locate the file.

Default Font Size = size of the text to the plot.

Number of Pen = 0

Min. Plot Spline Segment = .008

Plotter Page Size = X- 999

Page 471: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 453

Y- 70 (useable width of paper minus margin)

! Note: “Page Size” is the terminology generally used for plotters. However,in the case of cutters, page size refers to the dimensions of the areathat the cutter cuts. If the Page Size setting is smaller than the markersize when creating an NC file, the file will be blank.

• Click OK to exit the PLOTTER SETUP dialog box.

• Click OK to exit the PLOT dialog box.

Tips

I or V notches with cut attributes work best when exporting to a Gerber cutter

Configuring the Gerber Cutter S-91

There are 3 main steps to configuring the Gerber Cutter for use with the SGSsoftware: 1) Connecting the cutter, 2) Installing the Gerber software, 3)Configuring the SGS programs.

Connect the cutter

The cutter must be assembled and installed.

Install the Gerber Software

Gerber uses the Power Processor software to drive the cutter.

Configuring the SGS Software

• From the FILE menu, choose PLOT.

Page 472: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual454

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the workingarea.

• In the PLOT dialog box, select following boxes:

(Use = checked)

Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies = optional

Page Format = fixed scale

Options = Set to Plot Continuous.

Scale Factor = Set to X=1 Y=1

Whole pieces in frame only

Check intersections before plotting

Optimize Plot/Cut Order

Plotter Setting = Shows the Plotter language, Length and Width of page size.

! Note: Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.The Plot Setting dialog box will display.

Name = Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc.

Format = Gerber Cutter

(0,0) in Page Center = unchecked

Manual Page Replace = unchecked

Use CR/LF in code = unchecked

Page 473: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 455

*Use initialization in file header (M70…) = checked

*Use bitefeed offset = checked, -. 50

Gap After Plotting = amount of space left between plots.

Minimal Cut/Plot Line = 0

Use Plotter’s Built-in Font = unchecked

Plotter Font File = eng.fnt file and it’s directory. If no font file is shown,select Browse to locate the file.

Default Font Size = size of the text to the plot.

Number of Pen = 0

Min. Plot Spline Segment = .008

Plotter Page Size = X- 110

Y- 70 (useable width of paper minus margin)

! Note: “Page Size” is the terminology generally used for plotters. However,in the case of cutters, page size refers to the dimensions of the areathat the cutter cuts. If the Page Size setting is smaller than the markersize when creating an NC file, the file will be blank.

• Click OK to exit the PLOTTER SETUP dialog box.

• Click OK to exit the PLOT dialog box.

Tips

I or V notches with cut attributes work best when exporting to a Gerber cutter

Page 474: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual456

Configuring the Gerber Cutter S-93

There are 3 main steps to configuring the Gerber Cutter for use with the SGSsoftware: 1) Connecting the cutter, 2) Installing the Gerber software, 3)Configuring the SGS programs.

Connect the cutter

The cutter must be assembled and installed.

Install the Gerber Software

Gerber uses the Power Processor software to drive the cutter.

Configuring the SGS Grade, SGS PDS, or SGS Mark software

• From the FILE menu, choose PLOT.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the workingarea.

• In the PLOT dialog box, select following boxes:

(Use = checked)

Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies = optional

Page Format = fixed scale

Options = Set to Plot Continuous.

Scale Factor = Set to X=1 Y=1

Whole pieces in frame only

Page 475: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 457

Check intersections before plotting

Optimize Plot/Cut Order

Plotter Setting = Shows the Plotter language, Length and Width of page size.

! Note: Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.The Plot Setting dialog box will display.

Name = Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc.

Format = Gerber Cutter

(0,0) in Page Center = unchecked

Manual Page Replace = unchecked

Use CR/LF in code = unchecked

*Use initialization in file header (M70…) = checked

*Use bitefeed offset = checked, -. 50

Gap After Plotting = amount of space left between plots.

Minimal Cut/Plot Line = 0

Use Plotter’s Built-in Font = unchecked

Plotter Font File = eng.fnt file and it’s directory. If no font file is shown,select Browse to locate the file.

Default Font Size = size of the text to the plot.

Number of Pen = 0

Page 476: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual458

Min. Plot Spline Segment = .008

Plotter Page Size = X- 110

Y- 70 (useable width of paper minus margin)

! Note: “Page Size” is the terminology generally used for plotters. However,in the case of cutters, page size refers to the dimensions of the areathat the cutter cuts. If the Page Size setting is smaller than the markersize when creating a NC file, the file will be blank.

• Click OK to exit the PLOTTER SETUP dialog box.

• Click OK to exit the PLOT dialog box.

Tips

I or V notches with cut attributes work best when exporting to a Gerber cutter

Page 477: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 11: Help Menu 459

Chapter 11: Help Menu

The Help menu provides general information and help regarding SGSsoftware.

Index (F1)

The Index command opens on-line help services provided by SGS. This is acomprehensive guide to product information including a full glossary. Thiscommand works like other on-line Help files; click on the desired topic toview related information. Information may be viewed on screen or printed outfor future reference.

To access on-line Help:

• From the Help Menu select Index or press F1.

The Command Summary screen will be displayed which offers a completelisting of all the topics in the program. This on-line help program also includesa Search command, which will search by topic, and a History command,which will show a log of the recently viewed topics.

Keyboard

Select the Keyboard command to list an on-line help service. This optiondisplays all of the keyboard commands that can be used in OptiTex Mark. Thiscommand works like other on-line Help files. Click on the desired topic andthe screen will be displayed. You can view the topics on screen or you canprint them for future reference.

Page 478: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual460

Using Help

Select Using Help to learn the basics of using the on line help program.

Check Plug Protection

The Check Plug Protection option is used to view the plug (key) number. Itmay be necessary to look up this number when calling for technical support.Check Plug Protection also shows the SGS modules that you are entitled touse. Furthermore, when purchasing a new SGS module, the Check PlugProtection box is used to enter the codes that activate the new module. In orderto activate a new module, click on the SET button to the right of the newmodule listed in the Check Plug Protection dialog, and then enter the twocodes and click OK.

About OptiTex Mark

Choose the About OptiTex Mark command to find the version of software youare currently using. This information is necessary when contacting TechnicalSupport for help with your SGS software.

SGS On-Line

This menu gives you the option to connect on-line to our home page to getupdate information or connect the technical support department.Your Internet browser will go directly to OptiTex home page when selectingthe SGS HOME PAGE or SGS SUPPORT PAGE from this menu.

Page 479: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 11: Help Menu 461

Send File

This function enables you to sand a file to any e-mail adders. You can sand itto mailboxes in your company or around the world. An Internet accessrequired.

To send a file:

• Choose the SEND FILE command from the HELP menu.

• The E-MAIL dialog box appears.

• Enter the e-mail address that you want to send the message to.

• You have the option to attach more files and to add the messagename and subject.

Page 480: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual462

• Click O.K.

• The message with the attached files will be send to the desiredaddress

How to Contact SGSSGS Israel for international sales marketing and technical support:Scanvec Garment Systems (SGS)Ravnitzky 6Sgula Industrial ParkPetach-Tikva 49221, IsraelTel.: 972-3-904-9979Fax: 972-3-904-2710

SGS USA for inside the US sales and marketing:ScanVec Garment Systems (SGS)International Plaza Two, Suite 625Philadelphia, PA 19113-1518, USATel.: 610-521-5970 Toll free: (US & Canada) 877 RING OPTIFax: 610-521-1564

E-Mail: E-Mail Technical Support: [email protected]

E-Mail Sales & Marketing: [email protected]

Web Site: http://www.optitex.com

Page 481: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands 463

Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands

Pull Down Menu Shortcut Keys

As you may already know many of the commands in the pull down menushave shortcut keys that will activate them. Below you will find a summary ofthose shortcut commands.

OptiMark Menu Commands Activation Keys

File Menu:

File/New Ctrl+N

File/Open Marker File Ctrl+O

File/ Save Marker File Ctrl+S

File/Exit Alt+F4

Piece Menu:

Piece/Information Ctrl+I

Piece/Make Hole Ctrl+H

Piece/Internals Ctrl+E

Marker/Place Piece Ctrl+P

Marker/Place one Set Ctrl+Shift+P

Marker/Place All Ctrl+Shift+Alt+P

Page 482: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual464

Marker Menu:

Marker/Clear Marker Ctrl+C

Marker/Remove Marker Delete or Ctrl+R

Marker/Duplicate marker Ctrl+D

Alignment/Horizontal by Marker Center Alt+Ctrl+M

Alignment/Horizontal by Upper Limit Alt+Up

Alignment/Horizontal by Lower Limit Alt+Down

Alignment/Horizontal by Piece Center Alt+Ctrl+H

Alignment/Vertical by Left Limit Alt+Left

Alignment/Vertical by Right Limit Alt+Right

Alignment/Vertical by Piece Center Alt+Ctrl+V

Marker/Marker Definitions Ctrl+M

Marker/Placed Piece Cutter Ordering Ctrl/click left mouse button.

Marker/Relate Piece to Stripes Shift+Home

Marker/Undo Ctrl+Z

Grouping Menu:

Stripe Adjust Group Ctrl+G

Block Fuse Ctrl+B

Page 483: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands 465

Nesting Menu:

Compact Arrangement Ctrl+J

Stop Batch Command Ctrl+A

Help Menu:

Help/Index F1

Other Shortcut keys

Listed below are many other shortcut keys. These shortcuts are not menucommands, nor are they listed elsewhere in the program.

Return Piece to Piece Display Bar. Double click on piece

Add and remove annotation descriptions

on pieces Ctrl+T on the marker.

Fill Pieces on marker with color. Ctrl+F

Place a piece more times than listed onthe Size List Box Ctrl+P (enable minus“-”).

Aligning the selected piece with the center

of the closest placed piece on the marker. Ctrl+L

Redraw Command. Ctrl+Alt+R

Stop before cutting marked internal. Ctrl+Alt+B

Define a piece as foldable in the Up & Down Ctrl+U

Page 484: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual466

Define a piece as not foldable Ctrl+Q

Mirror Up Enter

Mirror Right Shift + Enter

Rotate 90 Right mouse button

Rotate 180 Right mouse button

Adjust Left Alt+4

Adjust Up Alt+8

Adjust Down Alt+2

Adjust Right Alt+6

Adjust Left-Up Alt+7

Adjust Left-Down Alt+1

Adjust Right-Down Alt+3

Adjust Right-Up Alt+9

Adjust Left 10 pixels at a time Left Arrow

Adjust Right 10 pixels at a time Right Arrow

Adjust Up 10 pixels at a time Up Arrow

Adjust Down 10 pixels at a time Down Arrow

Move overlapped pieces Click right and left mousebutton simultaneously

Page 485: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands 467

Tilt to the right F12

Tilt to the left F11

Uses of the Right Mouse Button

The left mouse button is the most frequently used button in OptiMark. Theright mouse button is used very infrequently, but it can be used at times toactivate shortcut commands. They are listed as follows.

Rotating Pieces with the Mouse

If the appropriate options are selected in the Piece Info dialog box, the rightmouse button can be used to rotate a piece 2 way or 4 way. Place the piece onthe marker, move the cursors on top of the piece and click the right mousebutton once.

For more information on rotating pieces, refer to the Rotate command in thePiece Menu chapter or the Rotate tool in the Tools chapter.

Rotating Pieces with the Rotate Tool

The right mouse button can be used with the Rotate Icon. Refer to the Rotatetool in the Icons chapter or the Rotate command in the Piece menu for moreinformation about rotating pieces.

Moving Pieces with the Bump, Bump/Rotate, and Jump/RotateTools

The right mouse button is used with the Bump, Bump/Rotate, and Jump/RotateTools to place pieces. Refer to the Tools chapter to learn more about bumpingand jumping pieces on the marker.

Page 486: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual468

Moving Overlapped Pieces

Click the right and left mouse buttons simultaneously over an overlappedpiece. The overlapped piece will move directly to the right of the piece it isoverlapping.

Fabric Spreading Methods

To fold pieces in a marker, the correct spreading method must be defined inthe Marker Definitions command of the Marker menu. The usage of foldedpieces depends on the way the material has been spread. Single Ply will notallow folded pieces. Tubular pieces can be folded on the upper or lower edgesof the marker. Tubular markers must have at least 2 plies. Faced pieces can befolded on the right and left edges or the marker. Faced markers must have atleast 2 plies. Folded Pieces can be folded on the upper, lower, right, and leftedges of the marker. Folded markers must have at least 2 plies. If you wish tofold pieces into quarters, you must have at least 4 plies.

! Note: For more information on spreading methods, refer to the MarkerDefinitions section of the Marker chapter.

Defining Pieces as Foldable

Foldable pieces in the up and down directions will have the letter U besidethem. Foldable pieces in the left and right directions will have the letter Sbeside them. To define pieces as foldable, use the Info or All Sizes Infocommands in the Piece menu or press Ctrl+U for up and down directions andCtrl+L for left and right directions. To define pieces as not foldable, use theInfo or All Sizes Info commands in the Piece menu or select the piece andpress Ctrl+Q.

! Note: Non-symmetric pieces can be defined as foldable.

Page 487: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands 469

Placing Folded Pieces

Use the numeric keypad (make sure the NUM LOCK is on) to place foldedpieces. Press the desired number key while placing a folded piece. You canonly fold pieces taken from the Piece menu.

! Note: When double clicking the mouse cursor must be within the markerarea and the piece in the piece menu, NOT on the marker.

Fold along the top double click + U or Up Arrow(8) from key pad

Fold along the lower edge double click + D or DownArrow (2) from key pad

Fold along the left edge double click + L or (4)

Fold along the right edge double click + R or (6)

Quartered piece in the Upper Left corner double click + Home (7)

Quartered piece in the Lower Left corner double click + End (1)

Quartered piece in the Upper Right corner double click + PgUp (9)

Quartered piece in the Lower Right corner double click + PgDn (3)

! Note: A folded piece cannot be part of a group. For more information oncreating and keeping groups, refer to the Group chapter.

Unfolding Pieces

To unfold a piece, double click on the placed, folded piece. The piece will bereturned to the menu. The piece can be replaced at anytime.

Page 488: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual470

Scroll Bars Automatic Utility

There is a new scroll bar automatic utility when you hold a piece on theworking area with the “Hand Tool” (drag tool), you can automatically movethe scroll bars. Dragging the piece on the working area while you hold thepiece will move automatically the two scroll bars (horizontal and vertical)according to the piece location on the working area.

Creating a Group

Click and drag a box around the desired pieces on the marker, or press andhold the Shift key and click to add other pieces to the group. A minimum oftwo pieces is required to create a group.

! Tip: The pieces will move as a group until a different piece is selected. Allof the grouped pieces will move simultaneously by clicking insideone of the grouped objects and dragging it to the desired location.You can also use the Bump and Jump tools to reposition a groupanywhere on the marker. Most commands and tools that work on onepiece will also work on a group.

! Note: For more information on creating and keeping groups, refer to theGroup chapter.

Page 489: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands 471

Shortcut Key Table:

Key Special keys Menu command Description

N Ctrl File / New Close the currentMarker and create anew

O Ctrl File / Open… Open an existingMarker

S Ctrl File / Save Save the currentMarker

F4 Alt File / Exit Exit

I Ctrl Piece / Info... Piece informationdialog

H Ctrl Piece / Make Hole Enable nesting ofother pieces insideselected piece

E Ctrl Piece / Internals… General Internalelement attributes

P Ctrl Piece / PlaceSelected Pieces /Place

Place the selectedpieces to Marker

P Ctrl + Shift Piece / PlaceSelected Pieces /Place One Set

Place one set of theselected pieces

Page 490: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual472

P Ctrl + Alt +Shift

Piece / PlaceSelected Pieces /Place All

Place all allowedselected pieces

R Ctrl Marker / RemovePieces

Remove selectedpieces from theMarker

<Delete> “” “”

D Ctrl Marker / Duplicate Duplicate theselected pieces onthe Marker

M Ctrl Marker / MarkerDefinitions...

Open Markerdefinitions dialog

Z Ctrl Marker / Undo Undo the lastMarker action

<Home> Shift Marker / RelatePiece to Stripes…

Define the selectedpiece positionrelative to theStripes

M Ctrl + Alt Marker / Alignment/ Horizontal byMarker Center

Align the selectedpieces to markercenter

H Ctrl + Alt Marker / Alignment/ Horizontal byPiece Center

Horizontally Alignthe selected piecesto adjustment piececenter

Page 491: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands 473

<Down arrow> Alt Marker /Alignment /Horizontal byDown Limit

Horizontally Alignthe selected piecesto lower limit

<Up arrow> Alt Marker /Alignment /Horizontal byUp Limit

Horizontally Alignthe selected piecesto upper limit

V Ctrl + Alt Marker /Alignment /Vertical byPiece Center

Vertically Align theselected pieces toadjustment piececenter

<Left arrow> Alt Marker /Alignment /Vertical by LeftLimit

Vertically Align theselected pieces toleft limit

Right arrow> Alt Marker /Alignment /Vertical byRight Limit

Vertically Align theselected pieces toright limit

B Ctrl Grouping /Block Fuse

Define a Fusing boxaround a selectedGroup

J Ctrl Nesting /CompactArrangement

Run Squeeze

Page 492: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual474

A Ctrl Nesting / StopBatch

Stop Batch File

<F1> Help / Index Help

<F1> Shift Context Help

U Ctrl Allows Up/Downside folding forselected piece

L Ctrl Allows Left/Rightside folding forselected piece

Q Ctrl Disable folding forselected piece

R Ctrl + Alt Redraw Marker

<Esc> Cancel Markerredraw

<F9> Ctrl + Shift Print screen

B Ctrl + Alt Enable OpStop onthe selected pieceOn/Off

F Ctrl Fill placed pieceswith color On/Off

T Ctrl Display piecesdescriptions On/Off

Page 493: Mark User Manual- optitex

Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands 475

<Down arrow> Shift selected piecesdown

<Up arrow> Shift selected piecesup

<Left arrow> Shift selected piecesleft

<Rightarr+A32ow>

Shift selected piecesright

<F2> Ctrl Flip selected piecesright

<Enter> “”

<F2> Ctrl + Shift Flip selected piecesup

<Enter> Shift “”

<F3> Ctrl Rotate selectedpieces 90 degrees

<F4> Ctrl Rotate selectedpieces 180 degrees

<F5> Ctrl Adjust left

<Num. 4> Alt “”

<F6> Ctrl Adjust up

Page 494: Mark User Manual- optitex

Mark Manual476

<Num. 8> Alt “”

<F7> Ctrl Adjust down

<Num. 2> Alt “”

<F8> Ctrl Adjust right

<Num. 6> Alt “”

<F9> Ctrl Adjust left - up

<Num. 7> Alt “”

<F10> Ctrl Adjust left - down

<Num. 1> Alt “”

<F11> Ctrl Adjust right - down

<Num. 3> Alt “”

<F12> Ctrl Adjust right - up

<Num. 9> Alt “”

Page 495: Mark User Manual- optitex

Glossary Terms 477

Glossary Terms

AAMA

Refers to a “neutral” file format created by the American ApparelManufacturing Association.

About

Selecting the About icon on the Standard toolbar in OptiTex PDS or theMarker toolbar in OptiTex Mark activates a dialog box displaying the versionof software currently in use.

Align

A command found in the Edit Menu of OptiTex PDS that repositions pointshorizontally, vertically, or at an assigned angle based on the selection of twoor more points.

Array

A command found in the Marker Menu of OptiTex Mark, which allowsselected piece(s) to be arranged into rows and columns automatically on themarker as specified in the Array dialog box.

Baseline

Baseline, also referred to as a grainline, controls the pattern piece’s alignmentin the working area and on the marker.

Base Size

The pattern size from which the program bases pattern changes and grade.

Page 496: Mark User Manual- optitex

Glossary Terms478

Buffer

An assigned area of space placed on a single pattern or patterns in OptiTexMark. A buffer is often used to create extra space between pattern pieces whencutting difficult fabrics.

Bundle

A pattern making term that refers to all patterns pieces necessary to make onecomplete item or Set.

Click

The action of pressing down on the left mouse button to select an object orcommand on the screen.

Clipboard

A location on the computer where items are stored when they are cut or copiedfrom a file or document. Items remain on the clipboard until another item iscut or copied.

Contour

The perimeter of the pattern piece.

Cursor

The screen symbol (e.g. the arrow) that indicates the position of the mouse onthe computer screen.

Page 497: Mark User Manual- optitex

Glossary Terms 479

Delta Value

This refers to the X and Y-axis used for directional movement on the workingarea. The X-axis represents the horizontal movement and the Y-axis representsthe vertical movement.

Dialog Box

The pop-up window that appears while using editing tools allowing the user toinsert parameters for a specific command.

Digitizing

The process of converting a two-dimensional object into data points as digitalnumbers, which are imputed into the computer to represent the pattern pieces.

Directory

User-defined sections on the computer were file could be stored. ( e. g.C:\Optitex7\Examples).

Display File

A marker file, usually containing one or more design files, which has beennested. (e.g. filename.dsp).

DXF

The graphical Data Exchange Format used by CAD systems to transfergeometric information.

Drive

The address of the storage media to be accessed: usually A and B forremovable diskettes and C, D for permanent hard disk or CD-ROM drive.

Page 498: Mark User Manual- optitex

Glossary Terms480

DSN File

DSN is the SGS extension for a OptiTex PDS file.

DSP File

DSP is the SGS extension for a Mark file.

EXE

Extension denoting a program file. This is a compiled computer programexecutable from DOS or from Windows by typing the file name on thecommand line and pressing the Enter key (DOS) or by double click on itsname (Windows).

Exit

Normal termination of software program.

Field

The white spaces in a dialog box where information can be entered.

File Extension

The three letters suffix at the end of a filename, which defines the format. Forexample: DSP, DSN, EXE, etc.

Flipping

The act of transposing the pattern piece horizontally or vertically while it islocated in the working area.

Page 499: Mark User Manual- optitex

Glossary Terms 481

Global Rule

A grading rule based on the total number of grading points of any pattern.Also called, “All Points Rule”.

Graded Pattern

A pattern that points have been assigned grading rules to control the way apiece changes from size to another.

Grading

The process of assigning measurement increments to a pattern to determinehow each size of the pattern should increase or decrease in relation to theprevious size.

Grading Point

A point on the pattern contour, line and curve, which you can attach a gradingvalue.

Grading Rule

The assigned measurement increments to define the grading at a point on thepattern piece for all sizes. There are three types of grading rules: fixed, pointand global.

Grading Table

A display window activated from the Grading Menu that displays the assignedmeasurement increments for previously established grading rules.

Page 500: Mark User Manual- optitex

Glossary Terms482

Grainline

Grainline, also referred to as a baseline, controls the pattern piece’s alignmentin the working area and on the marker.

Graphic Standard

The ASCII geometry in CAD/CAM file formats, which renders themcompatible with SGS programs.

Grayed Out

Refers to features or commands that are unavailable at the current time.Features and commands are typically grayed out when a selected item on thepiece does not correspond to the feature or command.

Group

A term used in OptiTex Mark to describe two or more selected patterns thathave been added to the pattern list and nested on the marker as a single unit.The Group is established by highlighting the pieces and selecting Keep in theGrouping Menu of OptiTex Mark.

Handle Point

Any notch or button with the number 1.

Hard Drive

A device made of aluminum disks coated with iron oxide permanentlymounted in the computer to store data and programs. Hard disks have morestorage capacity than floppy disks.

Page 501: Mark User Manual- optitex

Glossary Terms 483

Hex

Hexadecimal. A number written in base 16, which contains 16 possible digits:0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A (10), B (11), C (12), D (13), E (14) and F (15).

Icon

Icons are located on the toolbars and provide the pattern maker with fastaccess to the design tools.

Internals

Lines or points which are not located on the contour, and which can be usedfor style or cutting purposes.

Intersections

A term used in OptiTex Mark to describe the points where nested patternsoverlap on the marker area.

Invert

To relocate the first point on a selected line segment from one end the oppositeend. This command can be found in the Edit Menu of OptiTex PDS byselecting Segment and Show.

Key

A small piece of hardware approximately 1.5” by 2” with 25 small prongs onone end and 25 small inlets or holes on the other end. This key is plugged intoa parallel port on the back of the computer. If the computer has a printerattached, the key is plugged into the back of the printer plug as if to piggybackon the printer plugs. This item is what permits SGS software to run on yourcomputer. When this key is not plugged into the back of the computer, a“HASP plug not found” error displays on the screen in the HASP Error

Page 502: Mark User Manual- optitex

Glossary Terms484

Message dialog box. Authorizer keys are designed to prevent illegal copyingand illegal use of software. An authorizer key is also referred to as, Plug,Security Lock, Lock or Dangle.

Landscape Mode

The Landscape mode is the opposite of Portrait Mode in printer setup. Itallows output to be printed in the width direction of the paper.

Lock

See “Key ”.

Marker

The physical layout of all the pieces in a style cut from the same material atthe same time.

Marker File

A file created in OptiTex Mark that contains a nested marker.

Marker Size

The dimensions of the marker that have been specified in the MarkerDefinitions dialog box of the Marker Menu in OptiTex Mark.

Mirror

This command creates a symmetrical pattern piece by joining two pieces, theoriginal and a duplicate inverted piece, at a two-point line segment that isselected before using the Mirror command from the Piece Menu in OptiTexPDS.

Page 503: Mark User Manual- optitex

Glossary Terms 485

Nest

A term used to indicate the close placement of pieces on a marker layout.

Network

A collection of devices such as computers and printers, that are connectedtogether. A network is a tool for communication that allows users to store andretrieve information, share printers and exchange information.

Nested Pattern

A pattern that is drawn to show more than one size of the piece stacked on topof each other also called a stacked piece or graded nest.

Nesting

The placement of pieces on a marker to achieve the most compact andefficient layout.

Notch

A symbol placed on a pattern to indicate where the piece should be alignedwith another piece when the two are sewn together.

On-line Help

Help accessed by using either the F1 key for general index or Shift F1 keys forspecific help when an option or command is selected.

Order

An order is generated in OptiTex Mark to set up the marker. The order willinclude information such as the design files to be nested on the marker, thefabric width, and the number of each piece in the design file.

Page 504: Mark User Manual- optitex

Glossary Terms486

Output

Refers to data that is either printed or plotted.

Path

The alphanumeric code that guides the computer to a specific drive/directory/file based on the default selection defined in Autoexec.bat file.

Piece Display Bar

Refers to a pictorial list of pieces within a design file. The Piece Display Barshows a small picture of each piece in a design file.

Piece List

A window that is activated from the Display Menu in OptiTex PDS anddisplays the pattern pieces for the current design file.

Plot File

A file created for printing purposes. The resulting plot file can be sent to theoutput device from any PC (not necessarily equipped with SGS software) withthe DOS Copy command.

Point

The part of a piece’s boundary lines used to control the shape of the piece. Apoint may be a grading point or a non-grading point.

Point Rule

A rule, which is attached to a specific point and is related to the number ofsizes which are currently open, and only to those sizes.

Page 505: Mark User Manual- optitex

Glossary Terms 487

Polyline

Contour elements with shared attributes. (See also Single Elements).

Pop-up Menu

A list of options that appear on the screen after the right mouse button isclicked.

Pop-up Window

A window displayed on the working area as a result of user selected option.

Portrait Mode

The Portrait Mode is the opposite of Landscape Mode in printer setup. Itallows output to be printed in a lengthwise direction on the paper.

Remainders

The number of unplaced pieces in a marker file.

Right Mouse Click

The action of pressing down on the right mouse button to select an object orcommand on the screen.

Round

The act of modifying an angle into a curve.

Rule Library

A collection of existing grading rules which can be attached to a pattern.

Page 506: Mark User Manual- optitex

Glossary Terms488

Scroll

When the number of items in a window/dialog box exceeds the amount ofspace for display, an elevator bar appears at the right. By positioning themouse on this bar, the user can view all items at one window height.

Security Lock

See “Key ”.

Selected Piece

The piece displayed in the working area with a dashed line around the pieceperimeter.

Selection Tool

The screen symbol (e.g. the arrow) that indicates the position of the mouse onthe computer screen.

Set

A pattern making term that refers to all pattern pieces necessary to make onecomplete item or Bundle.

Shrink Factor

The amount a pattern is increased or decreased to allow for the dimensional ofthe fabric.

Size List

The box displaying all sizes being produced for a specific design file.

Page 507: Mark User Manual- optitex

Glossary Terms 489

Snap

When using a grid on the working area in OptiTex PDS, this option causes thecursor to jump to the nearest point, whether it be a contour point, grid point orpiece’s end point (grid points have priority).

Solution File

A completed order of nested patterns.

Stack Point

One point on a nested pattern where the grading is set at 0,0 for all sizes in thenest.

Swap Pieces

This icon in OptiTex PDS interchanges the original pattern piece in the piecedisplay bar with the piece being edited in the working area.

Toggle

Refers to the action of turning a command on/off by checking or uncheckingan item. For example, many options in the Display Menu toggle betweendisplaying on screen or not displaying on screen.

Tolerance Value

The maximum distance between two points on a contour to treat the points as asingle point.

Toolbar

A collection of icons positioned in a row on the screen. Toolbars provide easyaccess to commands and features when using the mouse.

Page 508: Mark User Manual- optitex

Glossary Terms490

Tools

Design functions in the software that enables the patternmaker to manipulatepatterns.

Waste Limits

This area is created on the markers edge prevents the cutting of pieces werethe fabric in flawed. The area can be defined in the Marker Menu underMarker Definitions.

Working Area

The area of the screen where pattern pieces are placed for editing.

WYSIWYG

This stands for, “What You See Is What You Get.” This concept is used in theSGS software to indicate that what appears on the computer screen is whatwill be printed or plotted onto paper.

X, Y Coordinates

A method of defining the horizontal (x) and vertical (y) location of gradepoints, notch attributes, and internals.

Page 509: Mark User Manual- optitex

Index

A

Add Point, 176All, 191Apply, 183Area/Perimeter, 188Arrows, 182About OptiTex PDS, 23All Sizes, 36Arrow/Selection Tool, 21Alert on Start, 134Annotation, 104, 122Alignment, 212Area Usage, 230Auto Save of Markers, 294AutoNest Queue, 311Autonesting of Selected Pieces, 291Autonesting Setup, 292

B

Buffer, 178Buffering, 162Base Size Mark, 105, 122Best Quality, 105, 123Boundary Lines, 119Browse, 99Bulge (Corde Error) Inches, 148Bump, 37, 42Batch Commands:, 302Batch Messages, 311Browse, 295Block Fuse, 253Baseline, 26

C

Code, 161,204Current, 188Current Type, 191Cad Files to Import, 110Change Log, 136Chapter 4 File Menu, 71Copies, 135Create NST-file (cncKad) too, 99Current Plotter, 149

Curve Points, 120Context Help, 23Check Current Solution, 221Clear Marker (Ctrl+C), 202Columns, 210Copy Marker, 208Current Trace, 228Colors According to Sets, 258cut, 261Continue, 289Continue Batch, 311Create NST-file (cncKad) too, 296

D

Delete, 183Delete a Piece:, 170Delete Point, 177Description, 161Default Font Size (Inches), 142Dictionary Dialog Box, 121Drill Holes, 120Depth, 30Disengaging a Tool, 20Delete Unused, 220Description, 204Detect Intersections, 221Duplicate (Ctrl+D), 208Display Pieces on Marker, 257Duplicate Marker, 296

E

Edit Piece, 174Edit Notch Dialog Box, 30Engaging a Tool, 19Exit (Alt+F4), 157Export to CAD/CAM Files, 100Enable Multiple Cutting of Segments, 197Enable Quality Overflow, 211Ending Point, 228

F

Flip, 176, 205Flip Vertically, 171, 172File Format, 110, 111

Page 510: Mark User Manual- optitex

Index

File Name and Browse, 134Find now, 88Finder Dialog, 86Format, 102, 119, 138Fill with Color (Ctrl+F), 258Fabric Pattern, 233Faced (LR), 200

G

Gap After Plotting, 141Grain (Base) Lines, 120Global Change Internal s Dialog Box, 190Global Change Internal’s Parameters, 189Global Info, 168Global Set, 188

H

Hole and Contour, 189Holes and Internal Contours, 185Hide Stripes, 263Horizontal by Marker Center, 212History, 74, 75, 76

I

Info (Ctrl+I), 159Internal Text, 170Internals (Ctrl+E), 180Inverse, 183Ignore CR. / LF, 116Ignore Frame, 116Internals By Tools, 261Ignore Internals, 112Import from CAD/CAM Files, 108Internal Cut, 120Internal Lines (draw), 120

J

Join Pieces, 174

L

Layers Table Dialog Box, 119Look in subfolders, 87

Length Depth Radius, 181Legal Intersection, 207Length, 199

M

Make Hole (Ctrl+H), 173Max Tilt, 164Mirror, 176Mode,33, 181Move Point, 178Make DSN files, 111Measure, 27, 28Manual Page Replace, 139Marker Boundary, 146Marker Header, 146Marker, 234Marker Definitions (Ctrl+M), 197Marker Menu, 197Match case, 88Match whole word only, 88Material, 111Material Code, 105, 122Material filter, 87Max Grade Angle, 115Merge Few Markers, 74Min. Plot Spline Segment, 141Minimal Plot/Cut line, 141Marker Full Length, 263

N

Name, 138Network Plotting, 134New (Ctrl+N),21, 71No Size, 111Notches, 120,260Note, 136Number of Pens, 145Nest++, 293Nesting Menu, 289No.of plies reserved, 206Number of Plies, 199, 231

O

Operation Stop,31, 182

Page 511: Mark User Manual- optitex

Index

Original, 176Open Design Files, 77Open file, 88Open Marker File (Ctrl + O), 71Open Style File, 91Order by Tools, 147Orientation, 105, 123Output Manager INI File, 149Optimize Cutter Ordering, 223

O Page in Center, 139

P

Pieces, 190Place (CTRL+P), 191Place All (CTRL+SHIFT+ALT+P), 192Place Folded Down, 194Place Folded Left, 192Place Folded Right, 193Place Folded Up, 193Place Left Down, 195Place Left Up, 194Place One Set (CTRL+SHIFT+P), 192Place right Down, 196Place Right Up, 195Plies, 161Print Report, 164, 167Piece Description, 36Pointer, 21Piece Code, 104, 122Piece Code filter, 87Piece Name, 104, 122, 161Piece name filter, 87Plot, 123, 124Plot Continuous, 146Plot Setting Dialog Box, 137Plotter (Output Manager) Setup, 124Plotter Font File, 142Plotter Page Size (inches), 140Plotter Setting, 137Print,150 299, 300Print All, 300Pattern Height (Y Value), 239Performing Optimum Calculations:, 229Piece Name, 204

Piece Parameters, 203Placed Piece Cutter Order, 226Placement on marker, 205Piece Description, 259Points (Buttons), 260

Q

Quality Lines, 121Quantity, 105, 111, 122,161Quality, 261

R

Remainders, 162Rotate, 176, 178Radius, 33Redraw, 25Rotate by 90 or 180, 40Rotate from Center, 41Rotate from Specific Point, 41Remove on End, 135Report, 93Report to Log, 136Restore Defaults, 105, 121, 123Relate Piece to Stripes (Shift+Home), 243Remove (DELor CTRL+R), 202Replace Pieces on Marker, 215Rotate, 205

S

Save, 22Show Cut/Plot Ordering, 36Stop, 25, 289Save (Ctrl + S), 95Save As, 95Save as Type, 97Save Current Nesting, 97Save only nested parts (and zero remainders), 100Scale Factor, 146Scale Factor Unit, 102select, 89Setup, 112Sew Lines, 120Show file name only, 87Size Name, 104, 122, 204, 259

Page 512: Mark User Manual- optitex

Index

Spline Angle, 115Style file name, 86,88Style Name, 122Save only nested parts (and zero remainders), 296Selected Design File, 299Solutions Report Details dialog box, 299Solutions Reports, 297Start Batch, 300Stop Batch, 310Sequence, 189Set Sequence #, 182Set Size, 191Show Numbers, 182Sort, 182Stripe Adjust Number, 181Sequence Number During Cutting, 227Singular, 199Starting Point, 228Stop before cutting, 207Stripe Adjust According To Set Only, 241Stripe Definition, 239Stripes Definitions Dialog Box, 240Substitute, 217Show Cut/Plot Ordering, 263Show Pieces List, 266

T

To Merge Marker Files:, 74To Output Using the OutMan Print Manager:, 126Tolerance, 113Turn (Grade) Points, 119To Define Stripes:, 239To Optimize the Piece:, 226To Relate Pieces (With Stripe Adjust Notches Or

Buttons) To a Stripe:, 244To Replace Pieces, 215Tool, 228Tubular (UD), 200Type of Material, 201Text, 33To Add a Button:, 31To Add a Notch:, 28To Add Internal Text To a Piece:, 34To Delete a Notch:, 28To Edit a Button:, 32

To Edit a Notch:, 29To Rotate from a Specific Point On the Selected

Piece(s):, 41To Rotate a Piece within the Marker:, 179To Rotate a Source Piece:, 179To Set All Sizes Info:, 167To Set Global Info for all Sizes on All Pieces:, 169To Edit a Selected Piece:, 175To Continue Nesting:, 289To Create a Batch File, 302To Start a Batch, 301To Start Auto-Nest, 290To View and print the log file, 297Total, 298To Cut a Piece:, 177To Edit a Selected Piece:, 175To Flip an Image Horizontally:, 172

U

Update, 91Use <M70> in File Header, 140Use Bite Offset, 140Use CL/LF in Code, 140Use Output Manager, 134, 148Use Plotter’s Built in Fonts, 142

V

Vertical by Piece Center, 215

W

Write Reports to file, 99, 296Width,30 199Working Units, 247

X

X, 240X End, 200X Origin, 200

Y

Y, 240Y End, 200

Page 513: Mark User Manual- optitex

Index

Y Origin, 200

Z

Zoom In, 26Zoom all Pieces on Marker, 264